frx-3e test v7.55 issue1.06 june2014

215
 T101-1755-05,06,001 FRX-3E (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Practices Equipment Specification Equipment Manual Installation Manual > On-Site Test & Maintenance Web-Based LT Manual T101-1755-05 ON-SITE TEST & MAINTENANCE FRX-3E IP/SDH RADIO Ecological, Econom ical, Ethernet SNMP-SV: V7.55 Issue1.06: June 2014 FUJITSU WIRELESS SYSTEMS LIMITED

Upload: kieu-hoang-anh

Post on 22-Feb-2018

220 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 1/214

 

T101-1755-05,06,001

FRX-3E (SNMP-SV: V7.55)

Practices

Equipment Specification

Equipment Manual

Installation Manual

> On-Site Test & Maintenance

Web-Based LT Manual

T101-1755-05

ON-SITE TEST &

MAINTENANCE

FRX-3E IP/SDH RADIOEcological, Econom ical, Ethernet

SNMP-SV: V7.55 

Issue1.06: June 2014

FUJITSU WIRELESS SYSTEMS LIMITED

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 2/214

 

01 Issue History

Issue No. Issue Date History

1.00

1.01

1.02

1.03

1.04

1.05

1.06

30th October, 2010

20th December, 2010

10th March, 2011

30th May, 2011

10th June, 2011

20th August, 2011

20th November, 2011

20th February, 2012

20th March, 2012

20th June, 2012

20th

 July, 2012

20th August, 2012

20th September, 2012

10th November, 2012

20th December, 2012

20th February, 2013

30th June, 2013

20th February, 2014

30th June, 2014

New release of DOC issue 1.0x series

New release of FRX-3E IP/SDH RadioDraft first issue

Rewrote based on latest R&D development stageDraft second issue

Review and re-wrote

First issueRegistered & Publication

Draft Second issue1

Revision of SV Condition Item & DescriptionSecond issue

Registered & Publication

Third issue publicationNew release of SNMP-SV firmware: V7.52Chapter 2, Sec. 2 WebLT PM revised

Fourth issue1New release of SNMP-SV: V7.53

Fourth issue2

Hardware setting on GESWFifth issue1

New release of SNMP-SV: V7.54

TRMD v1/v2 & GESW v1/v2 added

Fifth issue2Description of WebLT & Card replacement revised

Fifth issue3Some errors revised

Fifth issue4Some errors revised

Fifth issue5Some errors revised

Fifth issue6Reviewed all and revised

Fifth issue7Caution/Notice/Note defined

Fifth issue8DC power supply feed revised & others

SD/XSD/XPIC DADE setting of Hop Test revisedFifth issue9

Chapter 2, Sec. 2 WebLT revised

Sixth issue1New release of SNMP-SV: V7.55

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 3/214

 

02 Scope

This document describes all of Commissioning Test & Maintenance for Fujitsu’s FRX-3E

(SNMP-SV: V7.55) SDH Radio equipment with multiple baseband interfaces. For more

detailed technical information, please refer to another FRX-3E document.

Specifications are subjected to change without notice due to Fujitsu’s design improvements.

 A person who refers this document for On-Site Test Procedure, should be familiar withFRX-3E SDH radio, a PC (Personal Computer), an operating system, an applicationsoftware usage on the PC and basic of IP (Internet Protocol) network.

03 Non-Disclosure

Fujitsu Wireless Systems Limited has taken every care that the contents of this documentare correct at the time of going to press. If any errors are found, or any other comments arewished to be made, Please do not hesitate to contact us.

The contents of this document are protected under copyright and contain commercially

and/or technically confidential information. The content of the document must not be usedother than for purpose for which it was not provided nor may it be disclosed or copied (byauthorized recipient or otherwise) without the prior written consent of an authorized officer of

Fujitsu Wireless Systems Limited.

04 Relative Documentation

No Manual Name Code

1 FRX-3E Equipment Manual (SNMP-SV: V7.55) T101-1749-05

2 FRX-3E Equipment Specification (SNMP-SV: V7.55) T101-1751-05

3 FRX-3E Installation Manual (SNMP-SV: V7.55) T101-1753-05

4 FRX-3E Web-Based LT Manual (SNMP-SV: V7.55) T101-1759-05

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 4/214

 

Notes, Notices and Cautions

NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of

FRX-3E IP/SDH Radio Equipment and your System.

NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data

and tells you how to avoid the problem.

CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury or

death.

The contents of this document are subject to change without notice since Fujitsu Wireless Systems Limitedreserves the right to make changes in equipment design or components or SV firmware version roadmap

without notice, as progress in engineering or manufacturing methods may warrant.Neither this document nor any portion thereof, is to be reproduced in any form whatsoever without written

 permission from Fujitsu Wireless Systems Limited.

Copyright © 2005 Fujitsu Wireless Systems Limited. All Rights Reserved.

Microsoft is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.

 All other product names mentioned herein are the trademarks of their respective owners.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 5/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Pre-Test

1 Visual and Mechanical Test

1.1 Quantity Test ............................................................................................................... 1-1-1

1.2 Mechanical Test .......................................................................................................... 1-1-1

2 Safety Testing2.1 Visual Inspection ......................................................................................................... 1-2-1

2.2 Safety Testing ............................................................................................................. 1-2-1

3 Measuring Instrument Required

3.1 Measuring Instrument Required ................................................................................. 1-3-1

Chapter 2 Hardware & Software Setting

1 Hardware Setting on Card

1.1 Hardware Setting on SV ............................................................................................. 2-1-2

1.2 Hardware Setting on AUX INTF ................................................................................. 2-1-6

1.3 Hardware Setting on GESW....................................................................................... 2-1-8

2 Overview of WebLT (WebLT: V7.55)

2.1 Application Version ..................................................................................................... 2-2-1

2.2 Outline of WebLT ........................................................................................................ 2-2-1

2.3 Menu Tree & Menu Description .................................................................................. 2-2-22.4 Provisioning Item ........................................................................................................ 2-2-5

2.5 Condition Item ............................................................................................................. 2-2-7

2.6 Control Item .............................................................................................................. 2-2-11

2.7 Performance Item ..................................................................................................... 2-2-12

2.8 Inventory ................................................................................................................... 2-2-13

3 Initial Software Setting by License Key File

3.1 Initial Software Setting by License Key ...................................................................... 2-3-1

3.2 Initial Software Start-up by License Key ..................................................................... 2-3-2

3.3 Set-up Procedure ........................................................................................................ 2-3-2

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 6/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 ii

Chapter 3 Acceptance Test

1 Acceptance for FRX Rack

1.1 Visual Inspection of FRX Shelf and Rack................................................................... 3-1-1

1.2 Check for Incoming Power Supply at FRX Rack ....................................................... 3-1-2

2 Acceptance for Antenna System

2.1 Visual Inspection of Feeder Connection ..................................................................... 3-2-2

2.2 Check for Return Loss Result of Antenna System ..................................................... 3-2-2

 Appendix-A1 Return Loss Measurement .................................................................. 3-2-3

 Appendix-A2 Third-Order Inter-Modulation (IM3) Interference ................................. 3-2-7

 Appendix-A3 Antenna System Test ........................................................................ 3-2-11

3 Acceptance Test Item

3.1 Warning Messages ..................................................................................................... 3-3-1

3.2 Station, Hop and Section Test .................................................................................... 3-3-3

3.3 Provisional Acceptance Test (PAT) ............................................................................ 3-3-4

3.4 Final Acceptance Test (FAT) .................................................................................... 3-3-5

3.5 Measuring Instrument Required ................................................................................. 3-3-6

4 Station Tests

4.1 Hardware Settings ...................................................................................................... 3-4-1

4.2 Provisioning (Software Settings) ................................................................................ 3-4-1

4.3 Transmit Local OSC Frequency Tolerance ................................................................ 3-4-4

4.4 Transmit Output Power Level ..................................................................................... 3-4-5

4.5 Transmit Spectrum for Fixed Modulation Order ....................................................... 3-4-10

4.6 Transmit Spectrum for Dynamic Change of Modulation Order ................................ 3-4-13

4.7 Rack Alarm Test ....................................................................................................... 3-4-16

4.8 Change the Equipment to In-Service ....................................................................... 3-4-17

5 Hop Tests

5.1 Change the Equipment to Maintenance State ............................................................ 3-5-2

5.2 Receive Signal Level .................................................................................................. 3-5-3

5.3 Delay Equalizer Select................................................................................................ 3-5-6

5.4 Auto IF-IF Response Adjustment ............................................................................... 3-5-7

5.5 Auto SD DADE Adjustment (SD Installation Only) ..................................................... 3-5-8

5.6 Auto XPIC DADE Adjustment (CCDP Operation Only) ............................................. 3-5-9

5.7 Auto RPS DADE Adjustment .................................................................................... 3-5-10

5.8 Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test ........................................................................ 3-5-11

5.9 Dynamic Change of Modulation Order test .............................................................. 3-5-14

5.10 Stability Test of STM-1 Signal ................................................................................ 3-5-17

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 7/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 iii

5.11 Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Test ....................................................................... 3-5-20

5.12 Change the Equipment to In-Service State ............................................................ 3-5-22

6 Section Tests

6.1 UC/RUC Transmission Test ....................................................................................... 3-6-1

6.2 Order Wire (OW) Calling Test .................................................................................... 3-6-2

6.3 Stability Test of Wayside Signal ................................................................................. 3-6-3

6.4 Stability Test of STM-1 Signal .................................................................................... 3-6-5

6.5 Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Test ........................................................................... 3-6-7

Chapter 4 Trouble Shooting

1 General Information

1.1 General Information .................................................................................................... 4-1-1

1.2 Test Equipment Required ........................................................................................... 4-1-2

2 Trouble Shooting for Station Test

2.1 General Information .................................................................................................... 4-2-1

2.2 Identifying the Cause .................................................................................................. 4-2-1 Appenfix-A1 Unit Replacement…………………………………………………………….…4-2.2

3 Trouble Shooting for Hop Test

3.1 General Information .................................................................................................... 4-3-1

3.2 Identifying the Cause .................................................................................................. 4-3-1

3.3 Trouble Shooting for Equipment................................................................................. 4-3-2

3.4 Trouble Shooting for Propagation Path ...................................................................... 4-3-2

 Appenfix-B1 BER Characteristics Test (Laboratory Test)…………….……………….…4-3-3 Appenfix-B2 RSL Recording………..………………………………………………………4-3-7

4 Trouble Shooting for Section Test

4.1 General Information .................................................................................................... 4-4-1

4.2 Identifying the Cause .................................................................................................. 4-4-1

4.3 Technical Review of System Design Calculation ....................................................... 4-4-2

4.4 Trouble Shooting for Section test ............................................................................... 4-4-2

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 8/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 iv

Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance  

1 Maintenance Philosophy

1.1 Maintenance Philosophy 5-1-1

1.2 Human Machine Interface 5-1-1 

2 Condition Monitoring2.1 Condition Monitoring 5-2-1

2.2 RPS Condition Monitoring 5-2-4

2.3 RPS History Monitoring 5-2-5

2.4 Analog Monitoring 5-2-6

2.5 Analog Monitor 5-2-7

2.6 Database Download 5-2-8

3 Other Monitoring Function3.1 Loop Back 5-3-1

3.2 LED Indication on SV 5-3-3

3.3 LED Indication on Other Card 5-3-4

3.4 Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) Information 5-3-5

3.5 Receiver Signal Level (RSL) Recording 5-3-6

4 Unit Replacement 

4.1 Caution for Unit Replacement 5-4-1

4.2 Fan Replacement 5-4-3

4.3 MSTU and Other Units 5-4-4

4.4 SV Unit Replacement 5-4-5

4.5 Returning Replaced Unit 5-4-5

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 9/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 v

Chapter 6 RF Channel Expansion Procedure

1 General Information1.1 General 6-1-1

1.2 BRU Installation with/without Traffic Interruption 6-1-1

1.3 RF Channel Expansion Procedure Flow 6-1-2

1.4 Manual Setting of ACO and Buzzer OFF 6-1-3

2 RF Expansion Work2.1 TRMD Adaptor Installation (STEP-1) 6-2-1

2.2 DUP/ADPT Installation (STEP-2) 6-2-4

2.3 TX/RX/SD Filter Installation (STEP-3) 6-2-5

2.4 BEF Installation (STEP-4) 6-2-8

2.5 TRMD/BB INTF Card Installation (STEP-5) 6-2-10

2.6 Provisioning Setting (STEP-6) 6-2-11

2.7 BRU Installation with/without Traffic Interruption (STEP-7) 6-2-12

2.7.1 BRU Installation with Traffic Interruption (STEP-8) 6-2-12

2.7.2 BRU Installation without Traffic Interruption (STEP-9) 6-2-14

2.8 On-Site Test (STEP-10) 6-2-172.9 RPS Test for RF Expansion Channels (STEP-11) 6-2-18

3 RF Expansion Work for Ether Interface3.1 TRMD Adaptor Installation (STEP-1) 6-3-1

3.2 DUP/ADPT Installation (STEP-2) 6-3-1

3.3 TX/RX/SD BPF Installation (STEP-3) 6-3-1

3.4 BEF Installation (STEP-4) 6-3-1

3.5 TRMD/BB INTF Card Installation (STEP-5) 6-3-1

3.6 BRU Installation with/without Traffic Interruption (STEP-6) 6-3-1

3.6.1 BRU Installation with Traffic Interruption (STEP-7) 6-3-1

3.6.2 BRU Installation without Traffic Interruption (STEP-8) 6-3-1

3.7 Provisioning Setting (STEP-9) 6-3-2

3.8 On-Site Test for RF Newly Expansion Channels (STEP-10) 6-3-3

3.9 Ether Test After BBINTF (SPC) Card Installation (STEP-11) 6-3-4

3.10 RPS DADE & RPS Test for Existing SDH System (STEP-11) 6-3-5

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 10/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 vi

Chapter 7 System Upgrade by License Key

1 System Upgrade by License Key1.1 System Upgrade by License Key 7-1-1

1.2 System Upgrade Item 7-1-1

1.1 System Upgrade Procedure 7-1-2

 Appendix-A Application Note – TRMD Test Adaptor   A-1

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 11/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

Chapter 1 Pre-Test

1 Visual and Mechanical Test1.1 Quality Test 1-1-1

1.2 Mechanical Test 1-1-1

2 Safety Testing2.1 Visual Inspection 1-2-1

2.2 Safety testing 1-2-1

3 Measuring Instrument Required3.1 Measuring Instrument Required 1-3-1

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 12/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Pre-Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04  1-1-1

1 Vidual and Mechanical Test

1.1 Quantity Test

Check the quantities of whole FRX-3E radio equipment and materials inaccordance with the Contract Documentation.

1.2 Mechanical Test

Check the mechanical composition of FRX-3E radio equipment andmaterials on the relevant drawings prepared by the Contractor.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 13/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Pre-Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04  1-2-1

2 Safety Testing

2.1 Visual Inspection

Confirm that FRX-3E radio equipment and interconnecting cables havebeen installed in accordance with the Contract Documentation.

In particular, check the followings;

1) The connection of all earth bonding points

2) The integrity of the waveguide connection

3) Antenna polarization

2.2 Safety Testing

2.2.1 Protective Earth

Confirm that FRX-3E radio equipment is correctly grounded.

Frame GroundConnection

Rack Front

SD1 3 5 7

SDP 2 4 6

RX  1 3 5 7

RXP 2 4 6

TX1 3 5 7

TXP 2 4 6

Ext-BB shelf 

BBINTF(W5)

Basic shelf 

SV

AUXINTF

AUXINTF

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BRSW

BRSW

GESW

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBEXTADPT

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

BRSW

BRSW

TRMD(W7)

BBEXTADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W3)

ETSI Rack (2,200 mm)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W7)

TERM

TRMD(W6)

BRSW

TRMD(W1)

GESW

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W5)

TERM

TRMD(P)

BBINTF(W7)

BEF (x4 max.)

 Antenna Port (Max. 4)

V EN T V EN T V EN T V EN T

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 14/214

Pre-Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

1-2-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

2.2.2 Electrical Safety

Turn the circuit breaker of Radio Station OFF and confirm that power

supply cables (AWG1 to AWG4) from station DC power supply systemare fed correctly to the Basic through circuit braker (CB) and confirm thatthe polarity of cables are correctly connected on DC power terminals.

CAUTION: In case of the development of fire and smoke, SWITCH all circuit breakers OFF

forcedly from the protective safety means independent of the equipment.

DC Power from Office Power System-48V Nominal

Dual-feed available

both system-X and

system-Y

Power Cable Used: 

 AWG1 to AWG4sq (mm2): 21.15-42.41

PS Terminal (TM-1/2):M8 stud with washer

for cable fixture

CB

CB

Power Circuit Breaker (CB):Provided by the Contractor Approved component in

 Accordance with IEC60934

Rating: -57V/TOTAL:37A

Note: FUJITSU recommends that Circuit breaker(CB) is separately installed when dual-feed Powersystem is applied.

1 3 5 7 9 111315

P 2 4 6 8 101214

1 3 5 7 9 111315

P 2 4 6 8 101214

1 3 5 7 9 111315

P 2 4 6 8 10 12 14

L6G System 11G System

ETSI Rack (2,200 mm)

Basic shelf 

SV

AUXINTF

AUXINTF

BBEXTADPT

BBEXTADPT

TERM

GESW

GESW

BBINTF(W11)

BBINTF(W12)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W13)

BBINTF(W14)

BBINTF(W15)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W10)

TRMD(W14)

TRMD(W15)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W10)

TRMD(W11)

TRMD(W12)

TRMD(W13)

VENTV EN T V EN T V EN T VEN T

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W6)

TRADPT

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W1)

VE NT VE NT VE NT

TRMD(W7)

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 max.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 15/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Pre-Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04  1-3-1

3 Measuring Instrument Required

3.1 Measuring Instrument Required

Table 3.1 shows the typical measuring instrument list for performing thetesting.

In case of Station Tests & Hop tests Purpose

Table 3.1a Typical Measuring Instrument

No MeasuringInstrument

Model No.or specification

Description Remarks

1 Power Meter withSensor

E4419B/E9300A orequivalent

RF Power level

2 RF Attenuator 0-80 dB variable &30 dB fixed

TX power outputReceived signal level

10W type forTX output

3 Spectrum Analyser AT8563EC or equivalent Up to 26.5 GHz

4 Frequency Counter - Up to 30 MHz

5 Personal Computer - Recommended BrowserMicrosoft Internet Explorer

Version 8.0 or later

WebLT

In case of Section Tests Purpose

Table 3.1b Typical Measuring Instrument

No MeasuringInstruments

Model No.or specification

Description Remarks

1 SDH Analyser AT37717C or equivalent STM-1 signal transmissionBER & jitter measurement

2 PCM Channel Analyser

MS371A1 64k BER & continuity test

3 Digital Transmission Analyser

ME520B 2M BER & continuity test

4 Personal Computer - Recommended Browser

Microsoft Internet ExplorerVersion 8.0 or later

WebLT

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 16/214

Pre-Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

1-3-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

In case of Trouble Shooting Purpose

Table 3.1c Typical Measuring Instrument

No MeasuringInstruments

Model No.or specification

Description Remarks

1 RF Attenuator 0-80 dB, 30 dB fixed TX power outputReceived signal level

10W type forTX output

2 Power Meter withSensor

E4419B/E9300A orequivalent

RF Power level

3 Spectrum Analyser AT8563EC or equivalent Up to 26.5 GHz

4 SDH Analyser AT37717C or equivalent STM-1 signal transmissionBER & jitter measurement

5 Oscilloscope AT54810A or equivalent Pulse mask

6 PCM Channel Analyser

MS371A1 64k BER & continuity test

7 Digital Transmission

 Analyser

ME520B 2M BER & continuity test

8 Personal Computer - Recommended BrowserMicrosoft Internet ExplorerVersion 8.0 or later

WebLT

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 17/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06  i

Chapter 2 Hardware & Software Setting

1. Hardware Setting on Card1.1 Hardware Setting on SV 2-1-2

1.2 Hardware Setting on AUX INTF 2-1-6

1.3 Hardware Setting on GESW v1 2-1-8

1.4 Hardware Setting on GESW v2 2-1-9

2. Overview of WebLT (V7.55)

2.1 Application Version 2-2-1

2.2 Outline of WebLT 2-2-1

2.3 Menu Tree & Description 2-2-2

2.4 Provisioning Item 2-2-5

2.5 Condition 2-2-7

2.6 Control Item 2-2-11

2.7 Performance Monitor Item 2-2-12

2.8 Inventory 2-2-13

3. Initial Software Setting by License Key File

3.1 Initial Software Setting by License Key 2-3-1

3.2 Initial Software Start-up by License Key 2-3-2

3.3 Set-up Procedure 2-3-2

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 18/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06  ii

This page intent ional ly left blank

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 19/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue1.05  2-1-1

1 Hardware Setting on Cards

Basic shelf cards are set and tuned at the factory and commissioning test is toassure the system performance.

There is no need to carry out any setting change or readjustment for Basicshelf cards.

Fujitsu strongly recommends not to change or re-adjust settings unless theerror performance degraded seriously because of equipment deterioration.

Following information is provided for very skilled technical staffs who mayhave any chances to change or re-adjust settings in some specialcircumstances.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to change or readjust settings of

Basic shelf cards unless seriously needed.

If needed, use the WebLT as the first priority.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 20/214

Hardware Setting  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-1-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue1.05

1.1 Hardware Setting on SV

Item Switch Setting Position

BZ_EN(Buzzer Enable)

SWB1A-bit1 Buzzer Disable (Default)  OPEN

Buzzer Enable CLOSE

Figure 1.1-1 BZ_EN Switch Setting on SV

CLOSE OPEN 

Buzzer Enable

Web LT

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 21/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue1.05  2-1-3

Figure 1.1-2 Optional RAB Module Installation on SV 

RAB module assembly

(1) Metal spacing pipe x2

(2) RAB module x1(3) Fixing screw x4

There is a multi-pin connectorback of RAB module.

RAB module installation-1

(1) Metal spacing pipe installation on SV marked in white above: x2

Plug-in multi-pin connector forRAB module on SV

RAB module installation-2

(2) Plug-in RAB module to SV card using multi-connector

(3) Fix RAB module to SV card using fixing screws x2

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 22/214

Hardware Setting  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-1-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue1.05

1.2 Hardware Setting on AUX INTF

Item Switch Setting Position

4W OW input level ATT1 12 dB default at -4 dBr IN Table 1

4W OW output level ATT2 11 dB default at -4 dBr OUT Table 1

SW2BA & SW3BA: Only factory use ATT1 & ATT2: 4W-OW signal level attenuatorCN45A, CN65A & CN75A: Plug-in multi-pin connector for RUC moduleCN25A: Multi-pin connector for connection to/from external equipment

Figure 1.2 AUX INTF Card 

SW2BA SW3BA ATT1 ATT2

CN45A CN65A CN75A

CN25A

1 2 4 8 16

ATT C

ATT D

1 2 4 8 16

ATT A

ATT B

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

 ATT1 (IN)Default=12 dB

 ATT2 (OUT)Default=11 dB

-4 dBr +/- 2 dB(-16.0 to +3.0 dBr, 1 dB step

-4 dBr +/- 2 dB(-24.0 to +3.0 dBr, 1 dB step

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 23/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue1.05  2-1-5

Table 1. 4W Orderwire Input/Output Level Setting

Input Level (dBr)Setting of Attenuator

(ATT C, ATT D)Output Level (dBr)

Setting of Attenuator(ATT A and ATT B)

-16 0 Not applicable 0

-15 1 Not applicable 1

-14 2 Not applicable 2

-13 3 Not applicable 3

-12 4 +3 4

-11 5 +2 5

-10 6 +1 6

-9 7 0 7

-8 8 -1 8

-7 9 -2 9

-6 10 -3 10

-5 11 -4 11 (default)

-4 12 (default) -5 12

-3 13 -6 13

-2 14 -7 14

-1 15 -8 15

0 16 -9 16+1 17 -10 17

+2 18 -11 18

+3 19 -12 19

Not applicable 20 -13 20

Not applicable 21 -14 21

Not applicable 22 -15 22

Not applicable 23 -16 23

Not applicable 24 -17 24

Not applicable 25 -18 25

Not applicable 26 -19 26

Not applicable 27 -20 27

Not applicable 28 -21 28

Not applicable 29 -22 29

Not applicable 30 -23 30

Not applicable 31 -24 31

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 24/214

Hardware Setting  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-1-6 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue1.05

Optional Analog/G.703/V.11 module on AUX INTF

Note-1: VF/DGTL/V.11 module is plug-in’ed on AUX INTF card using CN45A, CN65A &CN75A and fixed by 2 screws. Detailed procedure is same as RAB module on SV.Note-2: Maximum number of RUC is 3 and mixture of VF/DGTL/V.11 module available.

Figure 1.2b RUC Module Installation on AUX INTF 

VF Module DGTL Module V.11 Module

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 25/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue1.05  2-1-7

Analog Signal Level Setting when VF module is installed

Input level: -4 dBr +/- 2 dB (-16 to +3.0 dBr, 1 dB step)

Output level: -4 dBr +/- 2 dB (-24.0 to +3dBr, 1 dB step)

Figure 1.2c VF Module IN/OUT signal Level Setting on AUX INTF 

1 2 4 8 16

ATT C

ATT D

1 2 4 8 16

ATT A

ATT B

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ATT1B (IN)

ATT2B (IN)

 ATT1B (IN)

Default=12 dB

 ATT2B (OUT)Default=11 dB

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 26/214

Hardware Setting  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-1-8 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue1.05

1.3 Hardware Setting on GESW (GESW v1)

SW83A position on GE SW Card

Addit ional Information:

(1) For the usage of Bit1, please refer to WebLT Manual, Chapter 5 Set-up, Section

6.12 Console Input and Appendix-B GESW QoS Mode Setting Procedure.

(2) For the usage of Bit4,

- SFP1/2 are down when all RF CH fail.

- In case that only Radio port1 is used, SFP1/2 at near-end is down when

SFP1/2 at far-end is down.

- In case that both Radio Port1/2 are used, SFP1 at near-end is down when

SFP1 at far-end is down and SFP2 at near-end is down when SFP2 at far-end

is down.

1.4 Hardware Setting on GESW (GESW v2)

Confirm that all Dip switches on GESW v2 are all“OFF

” (all zeros). 

Table 2 Switch Setting on GE SW

Bit Default Function

SW83A

1 ON ON : FPGA QoS function ENABLEOFF: FPGA QoS function DISABLE

2 OFF Debug use only (At factory setting)

3 OFF Debug use only (At factory setting)

4 OFF ON: Port Shutdown ENABLE when rebooted for SFP1/2OFF: Port Shutdown DISABLE when rebooted for SFP1/2

5 ON ON : Auto Negotiation ENABLE when rebooted for SFP1

OFF: Auto Negotiation DISABLE when rebooted for SFP16 ON ON : Auto Negotiation ENABLE when rebooted for SFP2OFF: Auto Negotiation DISABLE when rebooted for SFP2

7 OFF Debug use only (At factory setting)

8 OFF Debug use only (At factory setting)

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

O

F

F

SW83A

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 27/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-1

2 Main Function of WebLT (SNMP-SV: V7.55)

2.1 Menu Tree and Menu Description when GESW v2 is installed 

Figure 7.2 shows the menu tree and Table 2.1 shows menu description,

Figure 2.1 Menu Tree for GESW v2

Menu Tree when GESW v2 is set in the GESW setting menu.

Slot Config

RF Config

Modulation Config

CH Config

Service State

TX Setting

Menu

Condition Display

 ALL

TRMD

BB INTF

COM

IF Response

Control RPS

Loopback

RCI

HK Delay Equalizer Select

Set Date RSPI

Revise Date RUC

Restart SV RPS (GP)

RPI RSC

DADE Adjust WS

 ADJ Equipment Trace (SDH J0 byte)

 ALS Trace (Data)

Order Wire Baseband Interface

 ALS Setting

GE GESW Setting

Provisioning GE Composition Setting

GE Radio Port Setting

A B

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 28/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

Figure 2.1 Menu Tree for GESW v2 (Cont’d) 

Note-*1: Skip to Procedure C.

Download Physical Inventory  Analog Monitor Adjust

Download Severity List LED Mode

Upload SV/FIRM

Download Database ACT/DACT

STP Config

STP Status

Upload Severity List

Upload Database

Upload Lisence Key

History Control&Provisioning Login Setting

Download Condition HK Description

Upload FPGA/FIRM

Download Control&Provisioning RF Description

Download Performance CH Deascription

History & File

Threshold 1day Physical Inventory NE

 Analog Monitor Physical Inventory Unit

Initial Registeor Network Setting (IP)

History Condition Network Setting (Others)

Data GP<1/2>-Wn GESW-2 (*1)

Threshold NA DCC/OW CH Setting

Threshold 15min Order Wire

A B

Performance Data GP<1/2>-P GESW-1 (*1)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 29/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-3

Figure 2.1 Menu Tree for GESW v2 (Cont’d) 

C

GESW-<1/2> Configuration Ports

 Aggregation Static

LACP

Spanning Tree Bridge Settings

CIST Ports

IPMC IGMP Snooping Basic Configuration

SyncE VLAN Configuration

Port Group Filtering

VLANs VLAN Membership

Ports

QoS Port Classification

PTP Port Policing

Port Scheduler 

Port Shaping

QoS Control List

MAC Table

Storm Control

Monitor Ports State

Traffic Overview

QoS Statistics

QCL Status

Detailed Statistics

LACP System Status

Port Status

Port Statistics

Spanning Tree Bridge Status

Port Status

Port Statistics

IPMC IGMP Snooping Status

PTP Groups Information

MAC Table IPv4 SFM Information

VLANs VLAN Membership

Diagonostics Ping VLAN Port

Maintenance Restart Devices

Factory Defaults

Software Upload

Image Select

Configuration Save

Upload

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 30/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

Table 2.1 Menu Description

Menu DescriptionCondition

Display Display current unit allocation and RF channel allocation

ALL Display current (occurring) condition on NE

TRMD Display current (occurring) condition on TRMD(s)

BB INTF Display current (occurring) condition on BB INTF(s)

COM Display current (occurring) condition on SV and auxiliary unit

IF Response Display current amplitude/delay response of IF-IF transmission line

Control

RPS Control RPS (AID/Direction/Action)

Loopback Control Loopback (AID/Action/Direction)

RCI Control RCI (Remote Card Identifier)

HK Control HK (housekeeping) digital output port

Set Date Set date and time to the real time clock on SV

Revise Date Time adjustment by SNTP server

Restart SV Restart date and time of network layer protocol sub program

RPI Operate/Release - CW / XPICRST/TXOFF

DADE Adjust  Auto DADE’ing - RPS DADE/SD DADE/XSD DADE/XPIC DADE

ADJ Equipment TX power output adjustment  – TXPWR (Up/Down)

ALS ALS setting (Manual Restart/Test Restart)

Order Wire Control LED ON/OFF and buzzer ON/OFF when telephone calling

Provisioning

Slot Configuration Unit slot configuration for GP1-RPS and GP2-RPS

RF Configuration RF frequency type (RF band, Lower/Upper)

Modulation Configuration SDH/Ether, Mode: T-FIX/Adaptive, Adaptive modulationrange (MIX/MAX), T-QAM, R-QAM

CH Configuration RF channel arrangement (RF CH, Lower/Upper)

Service State Equipment service state (OOS/IS/IS-MT)

TX Setting TX setting (TXPWER/TX Overdrive/ATPC/MTPC)

Delay equalizer Select Delay equalizer select (Flat/None/Lowe/Upper/Both)

RSPI RSPI (RPS/SD/Route ID/BER Initiator)

RUC RUC (VF / DGTL / V.11 and CODIR/CONTRA)

RPS (GP) RPS (GP1/GP2/OCC/Priority CH/WTR)

RSC GP1-X/Y / GP2-X/Y

WS Use/No use of WS(SOH) and WS (RFCOH)

Trace (SDH J0 byte) Jo Line / Radio

Trace (Data) Direction (Line-X/Radio) / Change or no change / Alarm Mask

Base Band Interface None / STM-1 electrical/STM-1 optical/Giga Ether/SPC

ALS Setting  ALS (Automatic Restart/Disable), AR Time (60 to 300s)

GE GESW Setting GESW version, Port Shutdown Disable/Enable, SFP code,

MAC AddressGE Synchronous Ethernet Sync mode: Enable/Disable, Priority CLK1/2/3 of GESW1/2:L1/L2/R-1 to 8 recovered CLK/Internal CLK/EXT CLK

GE Port Setting Port: FE port / Radio port1/2 / Line port1/2, Item & Value: Port state /Flow control / Transfer mode

GESW-1 L2SW Refer to Table 7.2

GESW-2 L2SW Refer to Table 7.2

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 31/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-5

Table 2.3 Menu Description (Cont’d)

Menu DescriptionDCC/OW CH Setting DCC/OW CH selection (Use CH/Direction/Through/Drop)

Order Wire OW use/MIC/Headset/Volume setting

Physical Inventory NE Physical Inventory Data for NE - System Name / System Contact /System Location / Site Code / Equipment Code / Local Number /

Resource State / Equipment Note / NE TypePhysical Inventory Unit Unit/Radio Branch Label/SIU type/Item Code/HW Build Status /SWBuild Status/Manufacture Date/Serial Number

Network Setting (IP) IP address / Sub net address / Default Gateway

Network Setting (Others) SNMP Manager #n / Type Community Name #n / Community Namefor Read-Write / Community Name for Read-Only / SNTP Server Address / SNTP Revising Time / Time Zone / Daylight Saving TimeMode / Term of Daylight Saving Time / SV Firmware Version / MAC Address

Login Setting User ID type / New ID / New Password / Enter again

HK Description Set description for HK digital input/output port

RF Description Set Description for RF band and Lower/Upper band

CH Description Set Description for RF channel and Lower/Upper

ACT/DACT  Alarm activation time/Alarm de-activation time for alarm fluctuation

Analog Monitor Adjust Edit Analog Monitor Level Adjust Setting for TX/RX/SD level (dBm)LED Mode LED colour of Yellow or Green

STP Config STP Parameters: Switch priority / Port priority / Port cost / Bandwidth/Hello time / Forward delay time / Maximum delay time

STP Status STP parameter status

Performance

Data GP<1/2>-P Current performance of GP<1/2>-P)

Data GP<1/2>-<W1-Wn> Current performance of GP<1/2>-<W1-Wn>

Threshold NA SEV / NSES / Receive Level-1 / Receive Level-2 / Transmit Level

Threshold 15min 15 minutes value – RLTS-M-1 / RLTS-M-2 / RLTS-SD-1 / RLTS-SD 2/ TLTS

Threshold 1DAY 1 day value - RLTS-M-1 / RLTS-M-2 / RLTS-SD-1 / RLTS-SD 2 / TLTS

Analog Monitor RL-M / RL-SD / TL

Initial Register Clear current & Historical PM register, historical Condition andControl & Provisioning history

History & File

History Condition History condition occurred and restored

History Control&Provisioning History condition of control & provisioning occurred and restored

Download Condition Download condition

Download

Control&Provisioning

Download condition of control & provisioning

Download Performance Download condition of performance

Download Database Download condition of SYS/NET/HK/RF/MT/ADJ database

Download Physical Inventory Download condition of physical inventory

Download Severity List Download condition of severity list

Upload SV FIRM Upload condition of SV firmware version

Upload FPGA/FIRM Upload condition of FPGA/Firmware versionUpload Database Upload condition of Database

Upload License Key Upload condition of License Key 

Upload Severity List Upload severity list

Table 2.4 Menu Description for GESW v2 when GESW-<1/2> is selected

Menu DescriptionConfiguration

Ports Speed/Max. frame size/Excessive collision mode/power control

Aggregation

Static  Aggregation mode/group configuration

LACP LACP port configuration

Spanning Tree

Bridge Setting Basic/Advanced setting

CIST Ports CIST aggregated/normal port configuration

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 32/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-6 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

Table 2.4 Menu Description for GESW v2 when GESW-<1/2> is selected (Cont’d)

Menu DescriptionConfiguration (Cont’d)

IPMC

IGMP Snooping

Basic Configuration IGMP snooping/Port Related Configuration

VLAN Configuration IGMP snooping VLAN configuration

Port Group Filtering IGMP snooping Port Group Filter Configuration

SyncE Clock source nomination and status, Clock selection mode and status

MAC Table MAC Address Table Configuration

VLANs

VLAN Membership VLAN Membership Table

Ports VLAN Port Configuration

QoS

Port Classification QoS Ingress Port Classification

Port Policing QoS Ingress Queue Policers

Port Scheduler QoS Ingress Port Schedulers

Port Shaping QoS Engress Port Tag Remarking

QoS Control List QoS Control List Configuration

Storm Control QoS Port Storm Control

PTP FTP External Clock Mode

Monitor

Ports

State Port Status

Traffic Overview Port Statistics Overview

QoS Statistics Queuing Counters

QCL Status QoS Control list status

Detailed Statistics Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 to Port8

LACP

System Status LACP System Status

Port Status LACP Port StatusPort Statistics LACP Port Statistics

Spanning Tree

Bridge Status STP Bridge

Port Status STP Port Status

Port Statistics STP Statistics

IPMC

IGMP Snooping

Status IGMP Snooping Status/Statistics/Router port

Groups Information IGMP Snooping Groups Information

IPv4 SFM Information IGMP SFM Information

PTP PTP External Clock Mode/PTP Clock Configuration

MAC Table MAC Address Table

VLANsVLAN Membership VLAN Membership Status for Combined Users

VLAN Port VLAN Port Status for Static User

Diagnostics

Ping ICMP Ping

Maintenance

Restart Devices Restart Devices, Yes/No

Factory Default Factory Default, Yes/No

Software

Upload Firmware Update

Image Select Software Image Selection

Configuration

Save Configuration Save

Upload Configuration Upload

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 33/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-7

2.2 Menu Tree and Menu Description when GESW v1 is installed 

Figure 2.2 shows the menu tree and Table 7.3 shows menu description,

Figure 2.2 Menu Tree for GESW v1

Menu Tree when GESW v1 is set in the GESW Setting menu.Menu Slot Config

Condition Display RF Config

 ALL Modulation Config

TRMD CH Config

BB INTF Service State

COM TX Setting

IF Response Delay Equalizer Select

Control RPS RSPI

Loopback RUC

RCI RPS (GP)

HK RSC

Set Date WS

GE Composition Setting

Revise Date Trace (SDH J0 byte)

Restart SV Trace (Data)

RPI Base Band Interface

Orderwire GE Synchronous Ethernet

Synchronous Ethernet GE Port Setting

GE Link Aggregation

DADE Adjust ALS Setting

 ADJ Equipment GE GESW Setting

 ALS

 Aggregation Mode

Provisioning Static Aggregation

Dynamic Aggregation

GE MAC MAC Registration

GE Max Frame Setting MAC Table

 Age Time

A B

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 34/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-8 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

Figure 2.2 Menu Tree for GESW v1

Upload Severity List

Upload FPGA/FIRM

Download Performance

Download Database

Download Physical Inventory

Download Severity List

History Control&Provisioning

Download Condition

Download Control&Provisioning

Upload SV/FIRM

Upload Database

Upload Licence Key

 Analog Monitor GE Console Input DSCP

Initial Registor 

QoS Tag Priority

History & File History Condition

Physical Inventory Unit

Network Setting (IP)

Network Setting (Others)

Data GESW<1/2> GE RSTP

Extra L2SW Data

Threshold NA

Threshold 15min GE QoS

DCC/OW CH Setting

A B

Order Wire

Physical Inventory NE

Performance Data GP<1/2>-P GE VLAN

Data GP<1/2>-Wn

Threshold 1day GE Rate Control

ID Setting

Item Setting

RSTP Configuration

Item Setting

RSTP Status

Item Setting

LED Mode

STP Config

STP Status

Login Setting

HK Description

RF Description

CH Description

 ACT/DACT

 Analog Monitor Adjust

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 35/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-9

Table 2.3 Menu Description

Menu DescriptionCondition

Display Display current unit allocation and RF channel allocation

ALL Display current (occurring) condition on NE

TRMD Display current (occurring) condition on TRMD(s)

BB INTF Display current (occurring) condition on BB INTF(s)

COM Display current (occurring) condition on SV and auxiliary unit

IF Response Display current amplitude/delay response of IF-IF transmission line

Control

RPS Control RPS (AID/Direction/Action)

Loopback Control Loopback (AID/Action/Direction)

RCI Control RCI (Remote Card Identifier)

HK Control HK (housekeeping) digital output port

Set Date Set date and time to the real time clock on SV

Revise Date Time adjustment by SNTP server

Restart SV Restart date and time of network layer protocol sub program

RPI Operate/Release - CW / XPICRST/TXOFF

DADE Adjust  Auto DADE’ing - RPS DADE/SD DADE/XSD DADE/XPIC DADE

ADJ Equipment TX power output adjustment  – TXPWR (Up/Down)

ALS ALS setting (Manual Restart/Test Restart)

Order Wire Control LED ON/OFF and buzzer ON/OFF when telephone calling

Synchronous Ethernet Control clock priority of GESW1/2: Auto, priority1/2/3 clock

Provisioning

Slot Configuration Unit slot configuration for GP1-RPS and GP2-RPS

RF Configuration RF frequency type (RF band, Lower/Upper)

Modulation Configuration SDH/Ether, Mode: T-FIX/Adaptive, Adaptive modulation range(MIX/MAX), T-QAM, R-QAM

CH Configuration RF channel arrangement (RF CH, Lower/Upper)

Service State Equipment service state (OOS/IS/IS-MT)

TX Setting TX setting (TXPWER/TX Overdrive/ATPC/MTPC)

Delay equalizer Select Delay equalizer select (Flat/None/Lowe/Upper/Both)

RSPI RSPI (RPS/SD/Route ID/BER Initiator)

RUC RUC (VF / DGTL / V.11 and CODIR/CONTRA)

RPS (GP) RPS (GP1/GP2/OCC/Priority CH/WTR)

RSC GP1-X/Y / GP2-X/Y

WS Use/No use of WS(SOH) and WS (RFCOH)

Trace (SDH J0 byte) Jo Line / Radio

Trace (Data) Direction (Line-X/Radio) / Change or no change / Alarm Mask

Base Band Interface None / STM-1 electrical/STM-1 optical/Giga Ether/SPC

ALS Setting  ALS (Automatic Restart/Disable), AR Time (60 to 300s)

GE GESW Setting GESW version, Port Shutdown Disable/Enable, SFP code,MAC Address

GE Composition Setting R-n port connection on GESW1/2: Disable/RadioPort1/2, Line porton GESW1/2: Disable/Enable, EXT CLK on GESW1/2:Disable/Enable

GE Synchronous Ethernet Sync mode: Enable/Disable, Priority CLK1/2/3 of GESW1/2:L1/L2/R-1 to 8 recovered CLK/Internal CLK/EXT CLK

GE Port Setting Port: FE port / Radio port1/2 / Line port1/2, Item & Value: Port state /Flow control / Transfer mode

GE Link Aggregation

Aggregation Mode  Aggregation mode: Static / Dynamic / XOR

Static Aggregation Control: Add / Delete, Group port: Group port1/2,FE port / Radio port1/2 / Line port1/2: Disable/Enable

Dynamic Aggregation Port: FE port / Radio port1/2 / Line port1/2

Item Value: Protocol / Key value

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 36/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-10 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

Table 2.3 Menu Description (Cont’d)

Menu DescriptionGE MAC

MAC Registration Control: Add / Delete, VLAN ID: 1-5, Port: FE / Radio 1/2 / Line 1/2

MAC Table VLAN ID: 1-5

Age Time Set-up: 0 –

 65535

GE Max Frame Setting Port: FE / Radio1/2 / Line1/2, Max frame size: 1518  – 9600

GE VLAN

ID Setting Control: Add/Delete, VLAN ID: 1-4096, Port: Disable/Enable

Item Setting Item: VLAN aware/Ingress filtering/Packet type/Port VLAN IDValue: Disable/Enable or All/Tagged Only or NONE/1/2

GE RSTP

RSTP Configuration Item: System priority/Hello time/Max age/Forward delay/Forced version/Port aggregations

Item Setting Port: FE / Radio1/2 / Line1/2, Item: Port Protocol/Port edge/Port pathcost, Value: Disable/Enable etc.

RSTP Status -

GE QoS

Item Setting Port: FE / Radio1/2 / Line1/2, Item: QoS mode/QoS default/QoS userpriority, Value for each item

QoS Tag Priority Port: FE / Radio1/2 / Line1/2,Tag: 0-7, Priority: Low/Normal/Medium/High

DSCP DSCP: 0-63, Priority: Low/Normal/Medium/High

GE Rate Control Port: FE / Radio1/2 / Line1/2, Item: Policer/Shaper,Value: 128-3968 kbps, No limit

GE Console Input CLI command string

DCC/OW CH Setting DCC/OW CH selection (Use CH/Direction/Through/Drop)

Order Wire OW use/MIC/Headset/Volume setting

Physical Inventory NE Physical Inventory Data for NE - System Name / System Contact /System Location / Site Code / Equipment Code / Local Number /Resource State / Equipment Note / NE Type

Physical Inventory Unit Unit/Radio Branch Label/SIU type/Item Code/HW Build Status /SWBuild Status/Manufacture Date/Serial Number

Network Setting (IP) IP address / Sub net address / Default Gateway

Network Setting (Others) SNMP Manager #n / Type Community Name #n / Community Namefor Read-Write / Community Name for Read-Only / SNTP Server Address / SNTP Revising Time / Time Zone / Daylight Saving TimeMode / Term of Daylight Saving Time / SV Firmware Version / MAC Address

Login Setting User ID type / New ID / New Password / Enter again

HK Description Set description for HK digital input/output port

RF Description Set Description for RF band and Lower/Upper band

CH Description Set Description for RF channel and Lower/Upper

ACT/DACT  Alarm activation time/Alarm de-activation time for alarm fluctuation

Analog Monitor Adjust Edit Analog Monitor Level Adjust Setting for TX/RX/SD level (dBm)

LED Mode LED colour of Yellow or Green

STP Config STP Parameters: Switch priority / Port priority / Port cost / Bandwidth/Hello time / Forward delay time / Maximum delay time

STP Status STP parameter status

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 37/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-11

Table 2.3 Menu Description (Cont’d)

Menu DescriptionPerformance

Data GP<1/2>-P Current performance of GP<1/2>-P)

Data GP<1/2>-<W1-Wn> Current performance of GP<1/2>-<W1-Wn>

Data GESW-<1/2> Current performance of GESW-<1/2> L2SW data

Extra L2SW Data Current performance of L2SW extra data

Threshold NA SEV / NSES / Receive Level-1 / Receive Level-2 / Transmit Level

Threshold 15min 15 minutes value – RLTS-M-1 / RLTS-M-2 / RLTS-SD-1 / RLTS-SD 2/ TLTS

Threshold 1DAY 1 day value - RLTS-M-1 / RLTS-M-2 / RLTS-SD-1 / RLTS-SD 2 / TLTS

Analog Monitor RL-M / RL-SD / TL

Initial Register Clear current & Historical PM register, historical Condition andControl & Provisioning history

History & File

History Condition History condition occurred and restored

History Control&Provisioning History condition of control & provisioning occurred and restored

Download Condition Download condition

Download

Control&Provisioning

Download condition of control & provisioning

Download Performance Download condition of performance

Download Database Download condition of SYS/NET/HK/RF/MT/ADJ database

Download Physical Inventory Download condition of physical inventory

Download Severity List Download condition of severity list

Upload SV FIRM Upload condition of SV firmware version

Upload FPGA/FIRM Upload condition of FPGA/Firmware version

Upload Database Upload condition of Database

Upload License Key Upload condition of License Key 

Upload Severity List Upload severity list

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 38/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-12 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

2.3 Condition and Description List 

Table 2-4 shows the condition item and description list.

Table 2-4 Condition Item and Description List

1 PSFAIL PS Failure CR CR

2 CARD-FAIL Card Failure CR MN

3 RMVD Card is removed CR NA

4 MISMOUNT Card is mismounted CR MN

5 RCI Remote Card Identifier   - NA

6 TX FLR TX Block Failure CR MN

7 TCA-TLTS-15M Threshold Crossing Alert (TLTS-15m) - NA

8 TCA-TLTS-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (TLTS-24h) - NA

9 TCA-RLTS-M-1-15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-M-1-15m) - NA

10 TCA-RLTS-M-1-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-M-1-24h) - NA

11 TCA-RLTS-M-2-15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-M-2-15m) - NA

12 TCA-RLTS-M-2-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-M-2-24h) - NA

13TCA-RLTS-SD-1-15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-SD-1-15m)

- NA14 TCA-RLTS-SD-1-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-SD-1-24h) - NA

15 TCA-RLTS-SD-2-15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-SD-2-15m) - NA

16 TCA-RLTS-SD-2-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RLTS-SD-2-24h) - NA

17  ACTCW Carrier Wave Control in Active - NA

18 XPIC-OFF XPIC is OFF Control in Active - NA

19 SD-RCV-DN SD RX Received Level Down (BER=1.0E-3) MJ NR

20 MN-RCV-DN Main RX Received Level Down (BER=1.0E-3) MJ NR

21 LOF Loss of Frame CR NR

22 UAS-RP Unavailable State (RP) CR NR

23 TCA-RP-BBE15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RP-BBE-15m) - NA

24 TCA-RP-ES15M Threshold Crossing Alert (RP-ES-15m) - NA

25 TCA-RP-SES15M Threshold Crossing Alart (RP-SES-15m) - NA

26 TCA-RP-BBE24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RP-BBE-24H) - NA27 TCA-RP-ES24H Threshold Crossing Alert (RP-ES-24H) - NA

28 TCA-RP-SES24H Threshold Crossing Alart (RP-SES-24H) - NA

29 TCA-OFS15M Threshold Crossing Alert (OFS-15m) - NA

30 TCA-OFS24H Threshold Crossing Alart (OFS-24H) - NA

31 RADRM Radio Route ID Mismatch CR NR

32 RP-ERR-BP Excessive Bit Error Rate (BP Before FEC) - NR

33 SN-DEGRADE SN Degradation CR MN

34 XPIC-LOS-MN Loss of Signal in XPIC (MN XIF) MJ NR

35 XPIC-LOS-SD Loss of Signal in XPIC (SD IF) MJ NR

36 PSFAIL PS Failure CR CR

37 CARD-FAIL Card Failure CR MN

38 RMVD Card is removed CR NA

39 MISMOUNT Card is Mismounted CR MN40 RCI Remote Card Identifier   - NA

41 FRCD Card is Forced Switched - NA

42 LOF Loss of Frame CR -

43 STIM Section Trace ID Mismatch CR -

44 UAS-B1 Unavailable State (B1) CR NR

45 TCA-B1-BBE15M Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-BBE-15m) - NA

46 TCA-B1-ES15M Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-ES-15m) - NA

47 TCA-B1-SES15M Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-SES-15m) - NA

48 TCA-B1-BBE24H Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-BBE-24h) - NA

49 TCA-B1-ES-24H Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-ES-24h) - NA

50 TCA-B1-SES24H Threshold Crossing Alert (B1-SES-24h) - NA

51 TCA-OFS15M Threshold Crossing Alert (OFS-15m) - NA

52 TCA-OFS24H Threshold Crossing Alert (OFS-24h) - NA

53 LOOPBACK Loopback in Active Condition - NA

No Card AID Type Condition Type Status Description SA NSA

TRMD

EQPT

RSPI

CNCT

Baseband

EQPT

STM1RS

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 39/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-13

Table 2-4 Condition Item and Description List (Cont’d)

54 CARD-FAIL Card Failure - MJ

55 RCI Remote Card Identifier   - NA

56  ACTACO Alarm Cut Off in Act ive Condition - NA

57COMM-FAIL GP1R Communication Fail GP1-R

- MN58 COMM-FAIL GP1L Communication Fail GP1-L - MN

59 COMM-FAIL GP2R Communication Fail GP1-R - MN

60 COMM-FAIL GP2L Communication Fail GP2-L - MN

61 VENT-FAIL Ventilation Failure - WR

62 WS LOS Loss of Signal - MN

63 RSC LOF Loss of Frame - MN

64 LOPS Loss of Protection Signal - MN

65 SEINT-FAIL Serial Interface Failure CR

66 HK IN1 HK IN1 - MN

67 HK IN2 HK IN2 - MN

68 HK IN3 HK IN3 - MN

69 HK IN4 HK IN4 - MN

70 HK IN5 HK IN5 - MN

71 HK IN6 HK IN6 - MN72 HK IN7 HK IN7 - MN

73 HK IN8 HK IN8 - MN

74 HK IN9 HK IN9 - MN

75 HK IN10 HK IN10 - MN

76 HK IN11 HK IN11 - MN

77 HK IN12 HK IN12 - MN

78 HK IN13 HK IN13 - MN

79 HK IN14 HK IN14 - MN

80 HK IN15 HK IN15 - MN

81 HK IN16 HK IN16 - MN

82 HK OUT1 HK OUT1 - MN

83 HK OUT2 HK OUT2 - MN

84 HK OUT3 HK OUT3 - MN

85 HK OUT4 HK OUT4 - MN86 HK OUT5 HK OUT5 - MN

87 HK OUT6 HK OUT6 - MN

88 HK OUT7 HK OUT7 - MN

89 HK OUT8 HK OUT8 - MN

90 LKO-BSW Lockout of BSW - NA

91 LKO-USW Lockout of USW - NA

92 LKO-BSW FEND Lockout of BSW (FEND) - NA

93 SWREQ-BSW Switch Request in BSW - NR

94 SWREQ-USW Switch Request in USW - NR

95 SW-FAIL BSW Switching Failure in BSW - MJ

96 SW-FAIL USW Switching Failure in USW - MJ

97 FORCE-BSW Forced Switch of BSW - NA

98 FORCE-USW Forced Switch in USW - NA

99 MAN-BSW Manual Switch in BSW - NA100 MAN-USW Manual Switch in USW - NA

101 T-P BSW Traffic to Protection by BSW - NA

102 T-P USW Traffic to Protection by USW - NA

103 FORCE-BSW FEND Forced Switch of BSW (FEND) - NA

104 FORCE-USW FEND Forced Switch of USW (FEND) - NA

105 PRI-CH MIS Priority Channel Mismatch - NA

106 PS-FAIL PS Failure - MN

107 RCI Remote Card Identifier   - NA

108 RUC LOS Loss of Signal - MN

109 CARD-FAIL Card Failure CR -

110 RMVD Card is Removed CR -

111 MISMOUNT Card is Mismatched CR -

112 RCI Remote Card Identifier   - NA

113 LINK-DOWN R Radio Link Down - MN114 LINK-DOWN L Line Link Down CR -

115 BW-REDUCED Bandwidth Reduced CR MN

116 CLK-DOWN External Clock Down CR MN

Status Description SA

CONT

RPS

No Card AID Type Condition Type

Common

(AUX)

EQPT

Common

(GESW)

EQPT

Ether 

NSA

Common

(SV)

EQPT

CNCT

ENV

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 40/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-14 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

2.4 Control Item and Description List 

Table 2-5 shows the maintenance/Operation item and description.

Table 2-5 Control Item and Item Description

Note: For GESW v2, Synchronous Ethernet menu is not applicable.

RPS GP<1/2>- Direction Uni-Direction/Bi-Direction

<P, W1-W16> Action Operate Manual/Operate Forced/

Operate Lockout/Release Manual/

Release Forced/Release Lockout

Loopback GP<1/2>- Direction Line-X/Line-Y/Radio

<P, W1-W16> Action Operate/Release

RCI GP<1/2>- AID GP<1/2>-<P, W1-W16>-TRMD/

<P, W1-W16> GP<1/2>-<P, W1-W16>-BB INTF-X/

GP<1/2>-<P, W1-W16>-BB INTF-Y/

 ASV/AUX1/AUX2/GESW1/GESW2/

Release ALL

HK HKO-<1-8>   Action ON/OFF

Set Date - Year Range: 2002 to 2037

Month Range: 1 to 12

Day Range: 1-31

Hour Range: 0 to 23

Minute Range: 00 to 59

Second Range: 00 to 59Revise Date - Operate

Restart SV - Year Range: 2002 to 2037

Month Range: 1 to 12

Day Range: 1-31

Hour Range: 0 to 23

Minute Range: 00 to 59

Second Range: 00 to 59

Boot Select ACT/STBY

RPI GP<1/2>- Command CW/XPICRST/TXOFF

<P, W1-W16> Action Operate/Release

DADE Adjust GP<1/2>- DADE Adjust SD DADE/XSD DADE/XPIC DADE/<P, W1-W16> BPSDADE

 ADJ Equipm ent GP<1/2>- TXPWR UP/DOWN

<P, W1-W16>

 ALS GP<1/2>- ALS Manual Restart/Test Restart

<P,W1-W16>-

(X/Y>

Order Wire - Call ON ON/OFF

Synchronous Ethernet GESW-<1/2> Priority Select Auto/Priority1/Priority2/Priority3

 

Control AID Keyword Domain

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 41/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-15

2.5 Provisioning Item and Description List for GESW v2 

Table 7-6 shows the Set-up item and description list for GESW v2.

Table 7-6 Provisioning Item and Description List for GESW v2

Table 7-4 Set-up Item and Description List for GESW v2 (Cont’d)

Slot Configuration GP<1/2>- Flexible Slot Allocation Mode Enable/Disable

<P,W1-W16> Slot al location for fixed mode Slot 1-8 for GP1 & s lo t 9-16 for GP2

Slot allocation for flexible mode Slot 1 for GP1-P, slot 9 or 16 for GP2-P

Other slot is free to allocate for GP1/2

RF Configuration GP1/GP2 RF band & type 4 to 13 GHz band & Type

<P,W1-W16> independently for GP1/2, P, W1 to W16

Modulation Configuration GP1/GP2- SDH/Ether SDH / Ether  

<P, W1-W16> Mode T-FIX / Adaptive

 Adaptive Modulation Range(MAX/MIN) QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM

T-QAM QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM

R-QAM QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM

CH Configuration GP<1/2>- RF channel No. CH1 to CH18 & Lower/Upper  

<P,W1-W16> independently for GP1/2, P, W1 to W16

Service State GP<1/2>- Service state IS/OOS/IS-MT

<P,W1-W16>

TX Setting GP<1/2>- TX power NORMAL POWER/HIGH POWER

<P,W1-W16> TX Overdrive Enable/Disable

TPC ATPC-65 dBm/ATPC-55 dBm/

 ATPC-45 dBm/MTPC

MTPC +2 to -20 dB, 1 dB-step

Delay Equalizer Select GP<1/2>- Adjacent channel allocation None/Lower/Upper/Both

<P,W1-W16>

RSPI GP<1/2>- RPS Enable/Disable

<P,W1-W16> Space Diversity Enable/Disable

XPIC Enable/DisableRoute ID 0 to 15

BER 1.0E-3/5.0E-4/1.0E-4/5.0E-5/

1.0E-5/5.0E-6/1.0E-6

RUC GP<1/2>- 64K IF (only for G.703 interface) Co-directional/directional

RUC-<1-3>

RPS (GP) GP1/GP2 GP GP1/GP2

OCC Enable/Disable

Priority Ch W1 to W16/Disable

Wait To Restore None/1 to 20

RSC GP1/GP2 GP1-X Disable/GP1-P, W1-W16

GP1-Y Disable/GP1-P, W1-W16

GP2-X Disable/GP2-P, W1-W16

GP2-Y Disable/GP2-P, W1-W16

WS GP<1/2>- WS(SOH) Enable/Disable

<P, W1-W16> WS(RFCOH) Enable/Disable

Trace (SDH J0 byte) GP<1/2>- J0 Line-X Through/Section Trace

<P, W1-W16> J0 Line-Y Through/Section Trace/-

Jo Radio Through/Section Trace

Trace (Data) GP<1/2>- Direction Line-X/Radio

<P, W1-W16> Data Change/No change

Send Data 15 alphanumerical characters

Expect Data 15 alphanumerical characters

 Alarm Mask Enable/Disable

Base Band Interface GP<1/2>- BaseBand Interface None/STM-1 electrical/STM-1 optical

<P, W1-W16> Giga Ether/SPC ALS Setting GP<1/2>- ALS Automatic Restart/Disable

<P, W1-W16>- AR Time 60s/120s/180s/240s/300s

<X/Y>

Provisioning AID Keyword Domain

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 42/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-16 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

Table 2-6 Provisioning Item and Description List for GESW v2 (Cont’d)

GE GESW Setting GESW1/2 GESW version GESW v1/GESW v2

Port Shutdown Disable/Enable

SFP code -

MAC address -

GE Com position Setting GESW1/2 GESW-1/2-R-1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 RadioAgg1/RadioAgg2

GESW-1/2-L-1/2/3/4 Enable/Disable

GESW1/2 EXT CLK Enable/Disable

GE Radio Port Setting GESW1/2 GESW-1/2-RadioPort1/2/3/4 RadioAgg/Priority/Ratio

  RadioAggregation RadioAgg1/RadioAgg2

  Priority -/Priority1/Priority2/Priority3/Priority4

  Ratio -/10%/20%/30%/40%/50%

GESW-1 L2SW For details, refer to Appendix-A

GESW-2 L2SW For details, refer to Appendix-A

DCC/OW CH Setting GP1/2 Use Channel W1/W3/W5/W7

DCC/OW DCC/OW

Direction Line/Radio

Use Through/Drop

Order Wire - OW Enable Enable/Disable

MIC/Headset MIC/Headset

Volume Minimum/1 to 9/Maximum

Physical Inventory NE - System Name Max. 60 alphanumerical characters

System Contact Max. 60 alphanumerical characters

System Location Max. 60 alphanumerical characters

Site Code Max. 9 alphanumerical charactersEquipment Code Max. 5 alphanumerical characters

Local Number Max. 6 alphanumerical characters

Resource State Max. 9 alphanumerical characters

Equipment Note Max. 60 alphanumerical characters

NE Type Read Only

Phys ical Inventory Unit GP<1/2>- UNIT GP1/2-P, W1-W16, SV, GESW, AUXINTF

<P, W1-W7> Radio Branch Label Max. 32 alphanumerical characters

SIU Type -

Hardware Build Status -

Software Build Status -

Manufacture Date -

Serial Number 6 digits

Provisioning AID Keyword Domain

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 43/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-17

Table 2-6 Provisioning Item and Description List for GESW v2 (Cont’d)

Network Setting (IP) - IP default: 192.168.0.10

Sub Netmask default: 255.255.255.0

Gate Way default: 192.168.0.1

Network Setting (Others) - SNMP Trap Mode Bipmap/Object

SNMP Manager#1/#2/#3 default: 0.0.0.0

Type of Community Name#1/#2/#3 Read-Write/Read-Only

Communication Name for Sysmanager 

Community Name for Read-Write

Community Name for Read-Only

Standard Trap Enable/Disable

SNTP Server Address default: 0.0.0.0

SNMP Revising Time (Range: 0 to 23) : (Range: 0 to 59)

Last Synchronization Time y, m, d - h, m, sTime Zone (Range: 0 to 13) : (Range: 0/15/30/45)

Daylight Saving Time Mode Enable/Disable

DTS Start Month/Day/Hour  

DTS End Month/Day/Hour  

MAC Address

Login Setting - New Password 12 alphanumeric characters

Enter Password Again 12 alphanumeric characters

HK Description I-<1-16> IN/OUT IN/OUT

O-<1-8> No. 1 to 16 for DI (Digitai input, SV)

1-8 for DO (Digital output, CONT)

Description Max. 10 alphanumerical characters

RF Description - RF Type 4 to 13 GHz, Lower/Upper  Description max. 16 alphanumerical characters

CH Description - RF CH No. CH1 to CH16, Lower/Upper  

Description max. 8 alphanumerical characters

 ACT/DACT RSPI/STM1/RPS ACT 0 to 10

DACT 0 to 10

 Analog Monitor Ajus t GP<1/2>- RL-M -10 to +10

<P, W1-W16> RL-SD -10 to +10

TL -10 to +10

LED Mode - Provisioning value Yellow/Green

STP Configuration - Enable Status Enable/Disable

Switch Priority 0 to 65535

Port Priority o to 255

Port Cost o to 65535

Bandwidth

Hello Time 1 to 10

Forward Delay Time 4 to 30

Maximum Aging Time 6 to 40

STP Status - STP Status Root Switch Priority/MAC Address

Port State/Switch Status/Topology

Provisioning AID Keyword Domain

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 44/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-18 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

2.6 Provisioning Item and Description List for GESW v1 

Table 2-7 shows the Set-up item and description list for GESW v1.

Table 2-7 Provisioning Item and Description List for GESW v1

Slot Configuration GP<1/2>- Flexible Slot Allocation Mode Enable/Disable

<P,W1-W16> Slot a lloca tion fo r fixed mode Slot 1 -8 fo r GP1 & s lo t 9 -16 fo r GP2

Slot al location for flexible mode Slot 1 for GP1-P & slo t 9 or 16 for GP2-P

Other slot is free to allocate for GP1/2

RF Configuration GP1/GP2 RF banf & Type 4 to 13 GHz band & type

<P,W1-W16> independently for GP1/2, P, W1-16

Modulation Configuration GP1/GP2- SDH/Ether SDH / Ether  

<P, W1-W16> Mode T-FIX / Adaptive

 Adaptive Modulation Range(MAX/MIN) QPSK/8/16/32/64 /128/256/512QAM

T-QAM QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM

R-QAM QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM

CH Configuration GP<1/2>- RF channel number CH1 to CH18 & Lower/Upper  

<P,W1-W16> independently for GP1/2, P, W1-16

Service State GP<1/2>- Service state IS/OOS/IS-MT

<P,W1-W16>

TX Setting GP<1/2>- TX power NORMAL POWER/HIGH POWER

<P,W1-W16> TX Overdrive Enable/Disable

TPC ATPC-65 dBm/ATPC-55 dBm/

 ATPC-45 dBm/MTPC

MTPC +2 to -20 dB, 1 dB-step

Delay Equalizer Select GP<1/2>- Adjacent channel allocation None/Lower/Upper/Both

<P,W1-W16>

RSPI GP<1/2>- RPS Enable/Disable

<P,W1-W16> Space Diversity Enable/Disable

XPIC Enable/Disable

Route ID 0 to 15

BER 1.0E-3/5.0E-4/1.0E-4/5.0E-5/

1.0E-5/5.0E-6/1.0E-6

RUC GP<1/2>- 64K IF (only for G.703 interface) Co-directional/directional

RUC-<1-3>

RPS (GP) GP1/GP2 GP GP1/GP2

OCC Enable/Disable

Priority Ch W1 to W16/Disable

Wait To Restore None/1 to 20

RSC GP1/GP2 GP1-X Disable/GP1-P, W1-W16

GP1-Y Disable/GP1-P, W1-W16

GP2-X Disable/GP2-P, W1-W16

GP2-Y Disable/GP2-P, W1-W16WS GP<1/2>- WS(SOH) Enable/Disable

<P, W1-W16> WS(RFCOH) Enable/Disable

Trace (SDH J0 byte) GP<1/2>- J0 Line-X Through/Section Trace

<P, W1-W16> J0 Line-Y Through/Section Trace/-

Jo Radio Through/Section Trace

Trace (Data) GP<1/2>- Direction Line-X/Radio

<P, W1-W16> Data Change/No change

Send Data 15 alphanumerical characters

Expect Data 15 alphanumerical characters

 Alarm Mask Enable/Disable

Base Band Interface GP<1/2>- BaseBand Interface None/STM-1 electrical/STM-1 optical

<P, W1-W16> Giga Ether/SPC

 ALS Setting GP<1/2>- ALS Automatic Restart/Disable

<P, W1-W16>- AR Time 60s/120s/180s/240s/300s

<X/Y>

Provisioning AID Keyword Domain

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 45/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-19

Table 2-7 Provisioning Item and Description List for GESW v1 (Cont’d)

GE GESW Setting GESW1/2 GESW version GESW v1/GESW v2

Port Shutdown Disable/Enable

SFP code (Read only) -MAC address -

GE Composition Setting GESW1/2 GESW1/2-R RadioPort Connection RadioPort1/RadioPort2

GESW port1/2 setting Enable/Disable

GESW1/2 EXT CLK Enable/Disable

GE Synchronous Ethernet GESW1/2 Sync Mode Enable/Disable

Priority1/2/3 Clock GESW-1/2-L-1/2 Clock

GESW-1/2-R-1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 Clock

Internal / External clock

GE Port Setting GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/

Line Port1/Line Port2

Item Port State/Flow Control/Transfer Mode

Value for Port Status/Flow Control Enable/Disable

Value for Trans fer Mode Aoto/10 Half duplex/10 Full Duplex/

100 Half Duplex/100 Full Duplex/

1000 Full Duplex

GE Link Aggegation GESW1/2 Provisioning Value Source MAC/Destination MAC/XOR

- Aggregation Mode

- Static Aggregation GESW1/2 Control Add/Delete

Group Port Group-1/Group-2

FE Port Enable/Disable

Radio Port1 Enable/Disable

Radio Port2 Enable/Disable

Line Port1 Enable/Disable

Line Port2 Enable/Disable

- Dynamic Aggregation GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/Line Port1/Line Port2

Item Protocol/Key Value

Value for Protocol Enable/Disable

Value for Key Value xxxxxxx

GE MAC GESW1/2 Add/Delete Add/Delete

- MAC Registration VLAN ID 1-5 for Add, 1-3 for Delete

Port for Add None/FE port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2

Port for Delete Always

 Address xxxxxxx

- MAC Table GESW1/2 VLAN ID 1 - 5

- Age Time GESW1/2 Provisioning Value 0 - 65535

GE Max Frame Setting GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/

LinePort1/LinePort2

Max Frame Setting 1518 - 9600

GE VLAN GESW1/2 Control Add/Delete

- ID Setting VLAN ID 1 - 4096

FE Port Enable/Disable

Radio Port1 Enable/Disable

Radio Port2 Enable/Disable

Line Port1 Enable/Disable

Line Port2 Enable/Disable

- Item Setting GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/

Line Port1/Line Port2

Item VLAN Aware/Ingress Filtering/

Packet TypeValue for VLAN Aware/Ingress Filtering Disable/Enable

Value for Packet Type All/Tagged Only

Value for Port VLAN ID NONE/1/2

Provisioning AID Keyword Domain

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 46/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-20 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

Table 2-7 Provisioning Item and Description List for GESW v1 (Cont’d)

GE RSTP GESW1/2 System Priority 0 - 61440, 4096 step

- RSTP Configuration Hello Time 1 - 10

Max Age 6 - 40

Forward Delay 4 - 30

Force Version Normal/Compatible

Port Aggregation Disable/Enable

- Item Setting GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/

Line Port1/Line Port2

Item Port Protocol/Port Edge/Port Path Cost

Value for Port Protocol/Port Edge Disable/Enable

Value for Port Path Cost xxxxxxx

- RSTP Status GESW1/2

GE QoS GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/

- Item Setting Line Port1/Line Port2

Item QoS Mode/QoS Default/

QoS User PriorityValue for QoS Mode Tag/Port/Diffserve

Value for QoS Default Low/Normal/Medium/High

Value for QoS User Priority 0 - 7

- QoS Tag Priority GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/

Line Port1/Line Port2

Tag 0 - 7

Priority Low/Normal/Medium/High

- DSCP GESW1/2 DSCP xxxxxxx

Priority Low/Normal/Medium/High

GE Rate Control GESW1/2 Port FE Port/Radio Port1/Radio Port2/

Line Port1/Line Port2

Item Policer/Shaper  

Value 128 - 3968 kbps, 128 kbps step/

No Limit

GE Console Input GESW1/2 Enter CLI Command Strings xxxxxxx

DCC/OW CH Setting GP1/2 Use Channel P, W1 to W7

DCC/OW DCC/OW

Direction Line/Radio

Use Through/Drop

Order Wire - OW Enable Enable/Disable

MIC/Headset MIC/Headset

Volume Minimum/1 to 9/Maximum

Physical Inventory NE - System Name Max. 60 alphanumerical characters

System Contact Max. 60 alphanumerical characters

System Location Max. 60 alphanumerical characters

Site Code Max. 9 alphanumerical characters

Equipment Code Max. 5 alphanumerical characters

Local Number Max. 6 alphanumerical characters

Resource State Max. 9 alphanumerical characters

Equipment Note Max. 60 alphanumerical characters

NE Type Read Only

Phys ical Inventory Unit GP<1/2>- UNIT GP1/2-P, W1-W16, SV, GESW, AUXINTF

<P, W1-W7> Radio Branch Label Max. 32 alphanumerical characters

SIU Type -

Hardware Build Status -

Software Build Status -

Manufacture Date -

Serial Number 6 digits

Provisioning AID Keyword Domain

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 47/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-21

Table 2-7 Provisioning Item and Description List for GESW v1 (Cont’d)

Network Setting (IP) - IP default: 192.168.0.10

Sub Netmask default: 255.255.255.0

Gate Way default: 192.168.0.1

Network Setting (Others) - SNMP Trap Mode Bipmap/Object

SNMP Manager#1/#2/#3 default: 0.0.0.0

Type of Community Name#1/#2/#3 Read-Write/Read-Only

Communication Name for Sysm anager 

Community Name for Read-Write

Community Name for Read-Only

Standard Trap Enable/Disable

SNTP Server Address default: 0.0.0.0

SNMP Revising Time (Range: 0 to 23) : (Range: 0 to 59)

Last Synchronization Time y, m, d - h, m, s

Time Zone (Range: 0 to 13) : (Range: 0/15/30/45)

Daylight Saving Time Mode Enable/Disable

DTS Start Month/Day/Hour  

DTS End Month/Day/Hour  

MAC Address

Login Setting - New Password 12 alphanumeric characters

Enter Password Again 12 alphanumeric characters

HK Description I-<1-16> IN/OUT IN/OUT

O-<1-8> No. 1 to 16 for DI (Digitai input, SV)

1-8 for DO (Digi tal output, CONT)

Description Max. 10 alphanumerical characters

RF Description - RF Type 4 to 13 GHz, Lower/Upper  

Description max. 16 alphanumerical characters

CH Description - RF CH No. CH1 to CH16, Lower/Upper  

Description max. 8 alphanumerical characters

 ACT/DACT RSPI/STM1/RPS ACT 0 to 10

DACT 0 to 10

 Analog Monitor Ajust GP<1/2>- RL-M -10 to +10

<P, W1-W16> RL-SD -10 to +10

TL -10 to +10

LED Mode - Provisioning value Yellow/Green

STP Configuration - Enable Status Enable/Disable

Switch Priority 0 to 65535

Port Priority o to 255

Port Cost o to 65535

Bandwidth

Hello Time 1 to 10

Forward Delay Time 4 to 30

Maximum Aging Time 6 to 40

STP Status - STP Status Root Switch Priority/MAC Address

Port State/Switch Status/Topology

Provisioning AID Keyword Domain

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 48/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-22 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

2.7 Performance Monitor Item and Description List 

Table 2-8 shows the Performance Monitoring item description.

Table 2-8 Performance Monitoring Item and Item Description List

Note-1: When TRMD v2 or FPGA uploaded TRMD v1 is installed, QAM time is only displayed when set to

SDH/Ether=Ether and Mode=Adaptive, otherwise not displayed.Note-2: When TRMD v1 is installed, QAM time is always not displayed.

Section AID PM Item Performance Monitoring Item DescriptionBBE Near-end Background Block Error at STM1RS

ES Near-end Errored Second at STM1RS

SES Near-end Severely Errored Second at STM1RS

UAS Near-end Unavailable Second at STM1RS

OFS Near-end Out of Frame Second at STM1RS

BBER Near-end Background Block Error Rat io at STM1RS

ESR Near-end Errored Second Ratio at STM1RS

SESR Near-end Severely Errored Second Ratio at STM1RS

BBE Near-end Background Block Error at RP

ES Near-end Errored Second at RP

SES Near-end Severely Errored Second at RP

UAS Near-end Unavailable Second at RP

OFS Near-end Out of Frame Second at RP

BBER Near-end Background Block Error Rat io at RPESR Near-end Errored Second Ratio at RP

SESR Near-end Severely Errored Second Ratio at RP

PSAC Radio Protec tion Switch Actt ivat ion Count

FSRC Failed Radio Protection Switch Request Count

PSAD Radio Protec tion Switch Activat ion Durat ion

FSRD Failed Radio Protection Switch Request Durat ion

BBE Near-end Background Block Error at STM1RS

ES Near-end Errored Second at STM1RS

SES Near-end Severely Errored Second at STM1RS

UAS Near-end Unavailable Second at STM1RS

OFS Near-end Out of Frame Second at STM1RS

BBER Near-end Background Block Error Rat io at STM1RS

ESR Near-end Errored Second Ratio at STM1RS

SESR Near-end Severely Errored Second Ratio at STM1RSRLTS-M-1 Receiver Level Threshold crossed Section of Main RX specified by M-1

RLTS-M-2 Receiver Level Threshold crossed Section of Main RX specified by M-2

RL-M-MAX Receiver Level of Main RX Maximum

RL-M-MIN Receiver Level of Main RX Minimum

RLTS-SD-1 Receiver Level Threshold crossed Section of SD RX specified by SD-1

RLTS-SD-2 Receiver Level Threshold crossed Section of SD RX specified by SD-2

RL-SD-MAX Receiver Level of SD RX Maximum

RL-SD-MIN Receiver Level of SD RX Minimum

TLTS Transmitter Power Output Level Threshold crossed Section

TL-MAX Transmitter Power Output Level Maximum

TL-MIN Transmitter Power Output Level Minimum

QPSK QPSK seconds

8QAM 8QAM seconds

16QAM 16QAM seconds32QAM 32QAM seconds

64QAM 64QAM seconds

128QAM 128QAM seconds

256QAM 256QAM seconds

512QAM 512QAM seconds

RL-M Receiver Level of Main RX

RL-SD Receiver Level of SD RX

TL Transmitter Power Output Level

Note: PM item and description are based on ITU-T G.784, ITU-T G.828 and ITU-R F750-4 excluding QAM time..

STM1RS

EQPT

 Analog MON

 Analog

MONEQPT

TRMD

Modulation

QAM time

RADIO

STM1 RS

RSPI

RPS

LINE-X

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 49/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Hardware & Software Setting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06 2-2-23

Table 2-9 Performance Monitoring Item and Item Description List

15-Minite 24-Hour  

BBE

Number of Errored Block (EB) which is detected during the normal operation

period except the duration of SES and UAS.  0 to 16777215 units 0 to 4294967295 units

ESNumber of seconds which obtains at least one block error during the

 Available time 0 to 900 seconds 0 to 86400 seconds

SESNumber of seconds which contains error blocks more than Severely Errored

Threshold (SES) during the Available Time

 0 to 900 seconds

(default = 900)

 0 to 86400 seconds

(default = 86400)

UAS

Continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SES) which is

defined by the Unavailability Filter (UAF). In case of UAF = 10 seconds, a

period of UAS starts when Errored Block (EB) in each second exceeded

SEV for 10 consecutive seconds, and terminates when EB does not exceed

SEV for 10 consecutive second.

 0 to 900 sedonds

(default = 900)

 0 to 86400 seconds

(default= 86400)

OFSThe number of seconds which contains at least one occasion of 

synchronization loss of the frame alignment signal

 0 to 900 seconds

(default = 900)

 0 to 86400

(default = 86400)

BBER Background Block Error Ratio 0 to 1.4E-7 0 to 1.4E-9

ESR Errored Second Ratio 0 to 1.1E-3 0 to 1.2E-5

SESR Severely Errored Second Ratio 0 to 1.1E-3 0 to 1.2E-5

PSAC Radio Protection Switch Actual Count 0 to 1612800 times 0 to 154828800 times

FSRC Failed Radio Protection Switch Request 0 to 1612800 times 0 to 154828800 times

PSAD Radio Protection Switch Actual Duration 0 to 900 seconds 0 to 86400 seconds

FSRD Failed Radio Protection Switch Request Duration 0 to 900 seconds 0 to 86400 seconds

RLTS-M-1 Receive level threshold crossed seconds of Main RX by M-1 1 to 900 seconds

(default = 900)

 1 to 86400 seconds

(default = 86400)

RLTS-M-2 Receive level threshold crossed seconds of Main RX by M-2 1 to 900 seconds

(default = 900)

 1 to 86400 seconds

(default = 86400)

RLTS-SD-1 Receive level threshold crossed seconds of SD RX by SD-1 1 to 900 seconds

(default = 900)

 1 to 86400 seconds

(default = 86400)

RLTS-SD-2 Receive level threshold crossed seconds of SD RX by SD-2 1 to 900 seconds

(default = 900)

 1 to 86400 seconds

(default = 86400)

RL-M-MAX Maximum receive level of Main RX during the monitoring period -15 to -80 dBm -15 to -80 dBm

RL-SD-MAX Maximum received level of SD RX during the monitoring period -15 to -80 dBm -15 to -80 dBm

RL-M-MIN Minimum received level of Main RX during the monitoring period -15 to -80 dBm -15 to -80 dBm

RL-SD-MIN Minimum received level of SD RX during the monitoring period -15 to -80 dBm -15 to -80 dBm

TLTS Transmitter power output level threshold crossed seconds 1 to 900 seconds

(default = 900)

 1 to 86400 seconds

(default = 86400)

TL-MAX Maximum transmitter power output level during the monitoring periods +5 to +37 dBm +5 to +37 dBm

TL-MIN Mimimum transmitter power output level during the monitoring periods +5 to +35 dBm +5 to +35 dBm

 Analog MON Condition Description

RL-M Actual Receiver signal level of Main RX in normal state

RL-SD Actual Receiver signal level of SD RX in normal state

TL Actual Transmitter power output Level at normal state

Note: For analog monitoring, monitoring point is specified at Point A, A' and A D in accordance with ETSI EN301 217-1 V1.2.1 (2007-06)

+5 to +37 dBm, +/-1 dB

Monitor Type Condition DescriptionMonitoring Type

Range & Tolerance

-15 to -65 dBm, +/-3 dB

-65 to -80 dBm, +/-5 dB

-15 to -65 dBm, +/-3 dB

-65 to -80 dBm, +/-5 dB

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 50/214

Hardware & Software Setting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

2-2-24 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.55) Issue 1.06

2.8 Inventory Item and Description List 

Table 2-10 shows the Inventory Item and description.

Table 2-10a NE User Data Item and Description

Table 2-10b Hardware Inventory Item and Description

No. ITEM KEYWORD DESCRIPTION DOMAIN USER OPEN

1 System Name SYS-NAME System Name 60 ascii R/W

2 System Contact SYS-CONTACT System Equipment Contact 60 ascii R/W3 System Location SYS-LOC System equipment location 60 ascii R/W

4 Site Code SITE-CODESite code where the equipment is

installed9 ascii R/W

5 Equipment Code EQPT-CODE Equipment code 5 ascii R/W

6 Local No. LOCAL-NOCustomer's serial number within

equipment for each site6 ascii R/W

7 Equipment Note EQPT-NOTE Memo 60 ascii R/W

8 NE Type NE-TYPE

Equipment type used for 

customer's maintenance and

operation

1 ascii R

9 Resource State RESRC-STTNE build status used for customer 

maintenance and operation8 ascii R/W

Note*: R/W: Readable & Writable, R: only Readable

No. ITEM KEYWORD DESCRIPTION DOMAIN USER OPEN

1 SIU Code SIU-CODE SIU specific identification code 2 byte N

2 SIU Type SIU-TYPEManufacturer controlled SIU name

and drawing code20 ascii R

3 Frequency Type FREQ-TYPE Frequency type of TRMD 1 hex N

4 Hardware Build Status SIU-BLD-HWManufacture controlled SIU

hardware design change control2 ascii R

5 Manufacture Date SIU-MANU-DATE SIU manufacture data 5 ascii R

6 Serial Number SIU-SERIAL-NOManufacturer controlled SIU serial

number 6 ascii R

7 Customer Barcode SIU-BARCODEManufacturer controlled SIU

customer barcode10 ascii R

8 Acceptance Data SIU-ACPT-DATEManufacturer SIU acceptance

date8 ascii R

9 Warranty End date SIU-WARR-END-DATEManufacture SIU warranty period

date

8 ascii R

10 Release/Build Status SIU-BLD-STT

NE release/build status used for 

customer's maintenance and

operation

2 ascii R

11 Software Bui ld Status SIU-BLD-SW1SIU software/firmware design

change control 110 ascii R

12 Field Update Flag1 -Manufacture controlled field

update history flag110 byte R/W(*1)

13 Field Update Flag2 -Manufacture controlled field

update history flag210 byte R/W(*1)

14 FPGA Build Version ACT -Manufacturer controlled FPGA

version ACT10 ascii R

15FPGA Build Version

STBY-

Manufacturer controlled FPGA

version STAND-BY10 ascii R

16 FIRM Build Version ACT -Manufacturer controlled FIRM

version ACT10 hex R

17 FIRM Build Version STBY - Manufacturer controlled FIRMversion STAND-BY

10 hex R

18 Capability Code1 CAPA-CODE1 Activation key 1 of optional

function1 byte N

19 Capability Code2 CAPA-CODE2 Activation key 2 of optional

function1 byte N

20 Capability Code3 CAPA-CODE3 Activation key 3 of optional

function1 byte N

21 Capability Code4 CAPA-CODE4 Activation key 4 of optional

function1 byte N

22 Capability Code5 CAPA-CODE5 Activation key 5 of optional

function1 byte N

23 Capability Code6 CAPA-CODE6 Activation key 6 of optional

function1 byte N

24 Capability Code7 CAPA-CODE7 Activation key 7 of optional

function1 byte N

25 Capability Code8 CAPA-CODE8  Activation key 8 of optionalfunction

1 byte N

26 Capability Code9 CAPA-CODE9 Activation key 9 of optional

function1 byte N

Note-*1: Only open to the maintenance staff 

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 51/214

 

3 Initial Software Setting by License Key File

3.1 Initial Software Setting by License Key

License key procedure that enables initial software setting is as follows;

(1) FWL creates license key file that enables optional system functionsand delivers to the Customer according to the Contract Document.

(2) Customer downloads license key file to the relevant cards fromWeb-based Local Terminal (Web LT) and optional initial systemfunction is enabled.

(3) License key file is only effective for the relevant card and it is alsohighly digitally encoded not to be known by analogy.

Take Note

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 52/214

 

3.2 Initial Software Start-up by License Key

(1) Set initial software setting file to the PC folder.

(2) Open the History&Download menu.

Menu: History&File > Upload > License Key

(3) Select License Key folder from PC and Upload button.

Do you want Upload file? > OK > Operation was Received.

(4) Confirm the Capability List and optional function. 

3.3 Set-up (Provisioning) Procedure

 After completion of initial software setting by license key, set-up

(provisioning) is necessary. For details set-up procedure, please refer toWebLT manual.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 53/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

 

Chapter 3 Acceptance Test

1 Acceptance for FRX Rack

1.1 Visual Inspection of FRX Shelf and Rack................................................................... 3-1-1

1.2 Check for Incoming Power Supply at FRX Rack ....................................................... 3-1-2

2 Acceptance for Antenna System

2.1 Visual Inspection of Feeder Connection ..................................................................... 3-2-2

2.2 Check for Return Loss Result of Antenna System ................................................... 3-2-2

 Appendix-A1 Return Loss Measurement .................................................................... 3-2-3

 Appendix-A2 Third-Order Inter-Modulation (IM3) Interference ................................... 3-2-7

 Appendix-A3 Antenna System Test .......................................................................... 3-2-11

3 Acceptance Test Item

3.1 Warning Messages ..................................................................................................... 3-3-1

3.2 Station, Hop and Section Tests .................................................................................. 3-3-3

3.3 Provisional Acceptance Test (PAT) ............................................................................ 3-3-4

3.4 Final Acceptance Test (FAT) ...................................................................................... 3-3-5

3.5 Measuring Instrument Required ................................................................................. 3-3-6

4 Station Tests

4.1 Hardware Settings ...................................................................................................... 3-4-1

4.2 Provisioning (Software Settings) ................................................................................ 3-4-1

4.3 Transmit Local OSC Frequency Tolerance ................................................................ 3-4-4

4.4 Transmit Output Power Level ..................................................................................... 3-4-5

4.5 Transmit Spectrum for Fixed Modulation Order ....................................................... 3-4-10

4.6 Transmit Spectrum for Dynamic Change of Modulation Order ................................ 3-4-13

4.7 Rack Alarm Tests ..................................................................................................... 3-4-16

4.8 Change the Equipment to In-Service ....................................................................... 3-4-17

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 54/214

Table of Contents Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

5 Hop Tests

5.1 Change the Equipment to Maintenance State ............................................................ 3-5-25.2 Receive Signal Level .................................................................................................. 3-5-3

5.3 Delay Equalizer Select................................................................................................ 3-5-6

5.4 Auto IF-IF Response Adjustment ............................................................................... 3-5-7

5.5 Auto SD DADE Adjustment (SD Installation Only) ..................................................... 3-5-8

5.6 Auto XPIC DADE Adjustment (CCDP Operation Only) ............................................. 3-5-9

5.7 Auto RPS DADE Adjustment .................................................................................... 3-5-10

5.8 Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test ........................................................................ 3-5-11

5.9 Dynamic Change of Modulation Order test .............................................................. 3-5-14

5.10 Stability Test of STM-1 Signal ................................................................................ 3-5-175.11 Gigabit Ethernet Transmission test ........................................................................ 3-5-20

5.12 Change Equipment to In-Service State .................................................................. 3-5-22

6 Section Tests

6.1 RUC Transmission Test ............................................................................................ 3-6-1

6.2 Order Wire (OW) Calling Test .................................................................................... 3-6-2

6.3 Stability Test of Wayside Signal ................................................................................. 3-6-3

6.4 Stability Test of STM-1 Signal .................................................................................... 3-6-5

6.5 Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Test ........................................................................... 3-6-7

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 55/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

1   Acceptance for FRX Rack

 Acceptance for FRX rack are performed to ensure that proper installationprocedures detailed in “Installation Manual ” for  FRX-3E Radio Equipmenthave been followed. Acceptance verify the following;-- 

  Proper power wiring has been provided to the shelf (shelves).

  Equipment shelves are free of defects or damages.

The acceptance generally assume;-- 

   Accurate and concise system designations and office records areavailable to properly identify systems and equipment.

   Any faults found and not corrected during installation are referred to theinstallation group responsibility.

1.1 Visual Inspection of FRX Shelf and Rack

1. Locate the FRX shelf and rack that will house the equipment.

2. Position yourself at the front of the rack.

3. Check that no slide-in cards are installed. Remove any cards that areinstalled.

4. Check that the shelves are secure and free of defects or damages.

5. Check that all electrical connectors inside the shelves are properlysecured and aligned in the shelf slots.

6. Check that there are no broken, bent or mis-aligned contacts in theconnectors.

7. Check that there are no mis-aligned, dented or twisted shelves.

8. Check that there is no broken or damaged equipment(connectors, wiring, back wiring boards and so on.)

9. Check that all cablings and wirings are terminated and secured in place.

10. Check that the wiring from the central office power supply is connected to

the DC power terminal on the FRX shelf (shelves).11. Check that the signals from the office alarm/control system is connected

to the TRMD shelf alarm/control connectors correctly.

12. Check that the FRX cable connection to/from external equipment hasbeen made correctly.

13. Record the inspection results.

14. After acceptance, cards installation will be made in accordance withSystem Handbook provided by the Contractor.

Note: Report any problems to the installation group.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 56/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenence (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

1.2 Check for Incoming Power Supply to the FRX Shelf

This procedure lists the steps required to check the incoming power supply tothe FRX-3E Basic and Ext-BB shelves. Before beginning this procedure, turnon the main power supply of station power supply system.

1.2.1 Test Equipment Required

Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) or equivalent

1.2.2 Procedure

1. Confirm that the voltage on the Power Supply terminal on commonconnection area is –48 V nominal (Note-1).

2. Turn ON the circuit power breaker outside FRX.

Note-1: FRX-3E specification of input DC primary power is within –40.5 V to –57 V at interface “ A” 

including all of variation factors such as station DC power variation, DC power cable loss and so on.

Circuit Breaker (CB)

Rating: DC57V/37A

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX  1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

TERMExt-BB shelf 

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

Basic shelf 

ETSI Rack (2,200 mm)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W3)

BRSW

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

TERM

BBEXTADPT

BBEXTADPT

GESW

GESW

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

SV

AUX

INTF

AUX

INTF

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W7)

TRMD(W6)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W2)

VENTV EN T V EN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W9)

TRADPT

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W1)

V EN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD(W8)

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 m ax.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 57/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only   Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-2-1

2  Acceptance for Antenna System

 Acceptance for antenna system are performed to ensure that properinstallation procedures detailed in the antenna system installation manual

provided by the Contractor have been followed. Acceptance verify thefollowing;-- 

  Proper waveguide flange installation has been provided.

  Proper waveguide connection between feeder and antenna has beenprovided.

  Proper waveguide connection between feeder and indoor waveguide hasbeen provided.

  Proper waveguide connection between DUP/ADPT and indoor waveguidehas been provided.

  Waveguide feeder is free of defects or damages.

  Waveguide feeder is free of bend beyond permissible limit

  Proper return loss test result of antenna system has been provided withgood test results

The acceptance generally assume;-- 

   Accurate and concise system designations and office records areavailable to properly identify systems.

   Any faults found and not corrected during installation are referred to theinstallation group responsibility.

  The test equipment for return loss of antenna system required is available,properly tested and working correctly.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 58/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-2-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

2.1 Visual Inspection of Feeder Connection

  Proper connection between DUP/ADPT and indoor waveguide has beenprovided.

The acceptance generally assume;-- 

Do not connect feeder with the equipment until all the twists in the feeder havebeen corrected. See Figure 2.1. Twisting connection may damage waveguideand induce the IM3 distortion.

 A person experienced in waveguide connections should carry out theinstallation of the feeder to the equipment.

Figure 2.1 Twisting Wave guides and volt clearance

When the antenna feeders are connected to the radio equipment, payattention not to add a forced twisting torque to the radio equipment ports.

 And maximum M4 size volt clearance from the waveguide flange is 12.5 mm.

2.2 Check for Return Loss Result of Antenna System

  Proper return loss results has been provided

The acceptance generally assume;-- 

  Proper return loss measurement has been provided.

  More than 24 dB (FUJITSU recommends) for all allocated RF band hasbeen provided (5925 to 6425 MHz for L6 GHz band, for example).

  Smooth return loss results without spikes and so on has been provided

   Anomalies along antenna system may induce the IM3 distortion andinterfere to the receiver RF channels.

Regarding return loss measurement and IM3 interference, please see Appendix-A and B

Equipment Side

max. 12.5

M4 fixing volt

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 59/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only   Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-2-3

Appendix-A1 Return Loss Measurement

Figure A1.1 Return Loss Measurement

1. Connect the test equipment to the waveguide using coaxial cables asshown in Figure A1.1.

(a) Connect the output port of the sweep generator to the inputof the divider.

(b) Connect one output port(through) of the divider to thedirectional coupler and the other output port (divided) of

the divider, via a detector, to the network analyzerreference input port.

(c) Connect the output port (through) of the directional couplerto the waveguide transducer.

(d) Connect the reflected output port of the directional coupler,via a detector, to the input port of the network analyzer.

2. Calibrate the network analyzer (cal menu) using the waveguide short.3. Configure the network analyzer for a sweep range of allocated radio

frequency band (5,925 to 6,425 MHz for L6GHz band, for example).

4. Connect the waveguide transducer with the waveguide adapter and readthe reflected power (Return Loss) directly from the display of the networkanalyzer.

Return Loss specification is within 24 dB (FUJITSU recommends) forallocated radio frequency band (5.925 to 6,425 MHz for L6GHz band, forexample, Table 3.2) For detailed specification, Contractor will determine.

Note*: The waveguide transducer must be tuned to achieve a basically flat

response (as close to flat as possible), having the return loss of more than20 dB. Refer to Table 4.1 for theoretical return loss calculation data.

Sweeper  

Waveguide

Adapter

Directional

Coupler

Network Analyzer  

Waveguide

Transducer

Waveguide

Detector  

Detector  

Divider  

Antenna

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 60/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-2-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

5. In case that Return Loss is out of specification and/or there are spikes andbeard-like distortion within curve, it is necessary to confirm and repair thefeeder flaring installation, feeder dents or something.

NOTE :When sweeping waveguide on the drum, a sliding load must beinserted into the open end of the waveguide to form a temporary termination

(simulation of the antenna).

Table A1.1 Theoretical Return Loss Calculation Data

Return Loss(dB)Reflection

Coefficient (%)VSWR

14.0 19.95 1.50

15.0 17.78 1.43

16.0 15.85 1.3817.0 14.13 1.33

18.0 12.59 1.29

19.0 11.22 1.25

20.0 10.00 1.222

21.0 8.93 1.196

22.0 7.943 1.173

23.0 7.079 1.152

24.0 6.310 1.135

25.0 5.563 1.119

26.0 5.012 1.106

27.0 4.467 1.094

28.0 3.981 1.083

29.0 3.548 1.074

30.0 3.162 1.065

35.0 1.778 1.036

40.0 1.000 1.020

Conversion Formulas

Return Loss: RL  20log()

Reflection Coefficient:   (VSWR  1)    (VSWR  1)

Voltage Standing Wave Ratio: ................. VSWR  (1)     (1)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 61/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only   Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-2-5

Table A1.2 Measurement Range of RF Band

ITU-R RF Band RF (1*) ITU-R Recommendation F.xxx

4 GHz (3,600-4,200 MHz) 4G Type1 F.635-6 Annex-1 (2001-05)

2&4 GHz (3,800-4,200 MHz) 4G Type2 F.382-8 (2006-04)

4 GHz (3,600-4,200 MHz) 4G Type3 F.635-6 (2001-05)

4 GHz (3,600-4,200 MHz) 4G Type4 F.635-6 (2005-05)

U4 GHz (4,400-5,000 MHz) 5G Type1 F.1099-4 Annex-1 (2007-09)

L6 GHz (5,925-6,425 MHz) L6G Type1 F.383-8 (2007-09)

L6 GHz (5,925-6,425 MHz) L6G Type2 Based on F.383-8 (2007-09), ACMA RALI plan

U6 GHz (6,425-7,125 MHz) U6G Type1 F.384-10 (2007-09)

U6 GHz (6,425-7,125 MHz) U6G Type2 Based on F.384-10 (2007-09), ACMA RALI plan

U6 GHz (6,425-7,125 MHz) U6G Type3 Modified F.384-10 (2007-09), raster

U6 GHz (6,425-7,125 MHz) U6G Type4 Modified F.384-10 (2007-09), raster

7 GHz (7,125-7,425 MHz) 7G Type1 F.385-9 (2005-01), Fujitsu L7G band

7 GHz (7,125-7,425 MHz) 7G Type2 F.385-9 (2005-01)

7 GHz (7,125-7,425 MHz) 7G Type3 F.385-9 (2005-01)

7 GHz (7,110-7,750 MHz) 7G Type4 F.385-9 Annex-3 (2005-01)

7 GHz (7,425-7,725 MHz) 7G Type5 F.385-9 Annex-1 (2005-01), Fujitsu U7G band

7 GHz (7,425-7,725 MHz) 7G Type6 F.385-9 (2005-01)

7 GHz (7,425-7,725 MHz) 7G Type7 F.385-9 (2005-01)

7 GHz (7,250-7,550 MHz) 7G Type8 F.385-9 Annex-5 (2005-01)

7 GHz (7,125-7,425 MHz) 7G Type9 F.385-9 (2005-01)

7 GHz (7,250-7,550 MHz) 7G Type10 Modified F.385-9 Annex-5 (2005-01), +7 MHz shift plan

8 GHz (7,725-8,275 MHz) 8G Type1 F.386-8 Annex-6 (2007-07)

8 GHz (7,900-8,400 MHz) 8G Type2 F.386-8 Annex-3 (2007-07), OIRT plan

8 GHz (7,725-8,275 MHz) 8G Type3 Based on F.386-8 Annex-6 (2007-07), ACMA RALI plan

8 GHz (7,900-8,400 MHz) 8G Type4 Based on F.386-8 Annex-3 (2007-07) 14 MHz shift

8 GHz (7,900-8,500 MHz) 8G Type5 CEPT/ERC Rec2-06 Annex-2 (2007-06)

11 GHz (10.7-11.7 GHz) 11G Type1 F.387-10 recommends 1.1 (2006-02)

11 GHz (10.7-11.7 GHz) 11G Type2 F.387-10 recommends 1.2 (2006-02)

11 GHz (10.7-11.7 GHz) 11G Type3 Based on F.387-10 (2006-02), ACMA RALI plan

11 GHz (10.7-11.7 GHz) 11G Type4 Modified CEPT/ERC Recommendation 12-06E

13 GHz (12.75-13.25 GHz) 13G Type1 F.497-7 (2007-09)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 62/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-2-6 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

Table A1-3 RF Flange Specification

RF band Flange Mating Frequency Range(MHz)IEC standard

4G Type1 UDR 40 3,600 - 4,200

4G Type2 UDR 40 3,800 - 4,200

4G Type3 UDR 40 3,600  – 4,200

4G Type4 UDR 40 3,600  – 4,200

5G Type1 UDR 48 4,400  – 5,000

L6G Type1/2 UDR 70 5,925  – 6,175

U6G Type1/2/3/4 UDR 70 6,425 –

 7,125

7G Type1/2/3/9 UDR 70/84* 7,125  – 7,425

7G Type4 UDR 70/84* 7,110  – 7,750

7G Type5/6/7 UDR 70/84* 7,425  – 7,725

7G Type8/10 UDR 70/84* 7,250  – 7,550

8G Type1/3 UDR 84 7,725  – 8,275

8G Type2/4 UDR 84 7,900  – 8,400

8G Type5 UDR 84 7,900  – 8,500

11G Type1/2/3 UDR 100 10,700 –

 11,700

11G Type4 UDR 100 10,700  – 11,700

13G Type1 UDR 120 12,750  – 13,250

Note*: Both specification is available and customer will select.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 63/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) issue1.04

 

Appendix-A2 Third-Order Inter-Modulation (IM3) Interference

What is Inter-Modulation

Inter-modulation is generated in the presence of 2 or more RF carriers in a

system and form unwanted interference components

When passive components containing non-linear elements are the source ofthis interference, it is referred to as Inter-Modulation (IM).

IM product Theory

IM product generation through non-linear elements is represented as follows;

Y = F (X) = aX + bX2 + cX

3 + dX

4 + …. Non-linear equation

where X = fa + fb + fc + …….. fn: Carrier signals

Figure A1-1 shows Inter-Modulation Products.

Figure A1-1 Inter-Modulation Product

Note that IM multiplies bandwidth, that is, if bandwidth of fa and fb is 30 MHz,BW

IM3 = 90 MHz and BW

IM5 = 150 MHz.

The odd order IM is close to RF carrier frequency and IM3 is closest to RFcarrier and strongest IM product.

IM11

IM7=4fa-3fb

frequency⇒

IM2=fa-fb

IM4=2fa-2fb

IM5=3fb-2faIM5=3fa-2fb

IM6IM9

fa fb

IM3=2xfb-faIM3=2xfa-fb

Inter-Modulation Product

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 64/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) issue 1.04

Cause of Inter-Modulation in Microwave Radio System

In the microwave radio system, cause of non-linear elements in theantenna system in the presence of more than 2 RF signals is;

-  Surface oxides (feeder)

-  Loose metal to metal contacts (DUP/ADPT-WG connection)

-  Use of ferromagnetic materials (DUP/ADPT)

-  Contaminations, eg. solder splatters (Inside feeder, WG connector)

-  Insufficient thickness of plated metal, causing RF heating (feeder bend)

-  Too much or too little torque at connectors (DUP/ADPT-WG connection)

IM3 Interference to the Receiver ChannelsIn microwave radio system, inter-modulation (IM) generated in theantenna system is interfered to the receiver RF channels under conditions;

-  Common antenna system for transmitters and main receivers

-  High transmit output power for more than 2 RF channels

-  High sensitivity receiver (Threshold RSL less than –70 dBm)

-  IM3 product is generated in antenna system and interfered to receiver RFchannels as feeder echo as shown in Figure A2-1.

Figure A2-2 shows the IM3 interference example of U6GHz band. In thiscase transmit RF channels are lower half band and receiver RF channelsare upper half band.

 Appendix-A3 shows the antenna system test to confirm IM3 occurrence.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 65/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) issue1.04

Transmitter, +32 dBm each F1 to F8 Receiver, RSL threshold –70 dBm for 128QAM

Y = F (X) = aX + bX2 + cX

3 + dX

4 + …… 

X = F1 + F2 + F3 + F4 + F5 + F6 + F7 + F8

Figure A2-1 N-Order Inter-Modulation (IMn) Interference Mechanism

(IM3 is closest to RF CH carrier and has strongest IM result)

CIR

BPBP

CIR

BPBP

CH2CH4 CH3 CH1

Transmit side

Transmit side

CIR

C/WV(H)

Main

 Antenna 

CIRCIR

BPBP

BEF

BPBP

CH2CH4 CH3 CH1

Main Receive side

CIR CIR

BPBP

BEF

BPBP

CH5CH7CH8 CH6

CIR

BPBP

CIR

BPBP

CH8’  CH7 CH5

Main Receive

side

CH6’ 

DUP

Non-linearity elements⇒ IM3 generation

Non-linear elements

Y = F (x)

IM3 interference to RX signal

IM3 interference

route

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 66/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) issue 1.04

Figure A2-2 IM3 interference in case of U6GHz Band as an example

Fa=CH1, fb=CH2 to CH8

Fa=CH2, fb=CH1, CH3 to CH8

Fa=CH3, fb=CH1 and CH2, CH4 to CH8

Fa=CH4, fb=CH1 to CH3, CH5 to CH8

Fa=CH5, fb=CH1 to CH4, CH6 to CH8

Fa=CH6, fb=CH1 to CH5, CH7 and CH8

Fa=CH7, fb=CH1 to CH6, CH8

IM3-68

IM3-78

8 64QAM Carrier Signals IM3 Interference to RX channels

IM3-13 means IM3 product of fa=1 and fb=3

with 3 times bandwidth of carrier 

IM3-47 IM3-48

IM3-57 IM3-58

IM3-28IM3-27IM3-26

IM3-37 IM3-38IM3-36

CH

U6GHz Band

IM3-18IM3-17IM3-16IM3-15

5' 6' 7'

Transmitter 

8'1' 2' 3' 4'

Receiver 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

 6        9        6        0       

7        0        0        0       

7        0       4        0       

7        0        8        0       

 6        8        0        0       

 6        8       4        0       

 6        8        8        0       

 6        9       2        0       

 6        6       2        0       

 6        6        6        0       

 6       7        0        0       

 6       7       4        0       

 6       4        6        0       

 6        5        0        0       

 6        5       4        0       

 6        5        8        0       

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 67/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) issue 1.04

Appendix-A3 Antenna System Test

This test is intended to confirm the presence of IM3 occurrence from antennasystem, other system interfering signals and so on.

A3.1 Equipment Required

  MP1550A SDH Analyzer or equivalent

  10 dB RF attenuator

  WebLT

A3.2 Test Procedure

1. Change the equipment to Maintenance State by WebLT both near-endand far-end stations.

Menu: Provisioning > Service State

Set Provisioning Value for specific AID to test to IS-MT from IS.

Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “Command Requestwas received. > Closed.

2. Connect SDH analyzer between far-end and near-end station to measureBER performance for the specific working channel.

3. Set TPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) setting state at near-end

station to “MTPC” for the specific RF channel.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 68/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-2- On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) issue 1.04

4. Set MTPC setting state at far-end station to “-20 dB” for the specific RFchannel and other RF channels are power OFF at far-end station.

Menu: Provisioning > TX Setting

Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “CommandRequest was received. > Closed. 

5. Remove TX OUT connection between the RF branching network (BRU)and MSTU ADPT (TX) at far-end station for the specific RF channel.

6. Connect RF attenuator to the TR ADPT TX OUT (at Point B’).(RSL is set to approx. 10 dB higher than threshold RSL at BER=10(-6))

7. Measure BER performance and confirm error free for fifteen (15) minutes.

8. TPC setting state at far-end station to “MTPC” for the specific RF channel.

9. Repeat item 2 through item 8 for all RF channels.

10. TPC setting state both far-end and near-end station for all RF channels.

11. Change the equipment to “In-Service” State by WebLT both near-endand far-end station.

Note-1: Report any problems to the installation group to check the antenna system.Note-2: Schematic block diagram of Antenna system is shown in Figure A3.1.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 69/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) issue1.04

IM3

Normal RSL

RSL around 15 dB higher 

than threshold RSL

TX-5

TX-7

 ATT

 ATT      C      I      R

 BP

BP

TX-6

TX-8

TX1

TX-3

TX-2

TX-4

Near-end station Far-end station

IM3

All MSTUs are power ON Only MSTU-4 is power ON, for example

No intereference condition

 Another system interference are

confirmed at advance

RX-4

RX-2

RX-3

RX-1

RX-8

RX-6

RX-7

RX-5

RX-5'

RX-7'

RX-6'

RX-8'

RX-1'

RX-3'

RX-2'

RX-4'

 ATT

 ATT

 ATT

 ATT

 ATT

 ATTBP

BP

TX-8'

TX-6'

TX-7'

TX-5'

TX-4'

TX-2'

TX-3'

TX-1'   C      I      R

 BP

BP

      C      I      R

 BP

BP

      C      I      R

 BP

BP

      C      I      R

      D      U      P

BP

BP      C      I      R

      C      I      R

 BP

BP

      C      I      R

 BP

BP

BP  C      

I      R      

BP

D       U      P      

BP   C      I      R      

BP

BP  C      

I      R      BP

BP  C      

I      R      BP

BP  C      

I      R      BP

RX-4

 C      I      R      

BP

BP

BP  C      

I      R      BP

BP  C      

I      R      BP

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 70/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

5-2- On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) issue 1.04

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 71/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only   Acceptance Test Item

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04  3-3-1

3 Acceptance Test ItemThis section outlines the acceptance tests required to commission theFRX-3E Radio System.

3.1 Warning Messages

The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using, ormaintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety of allpersonnel and the protection of equipment.

3.1.1 Laser Warning

Figure 3.1 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting andreceiving units:

CAUTION

Invisible laser radiation from

connectors when uncoupled.

AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO

BEAM.

Figure 3.1 Laser Warning Labels

3.1.2 Inserting Slide-in Cards

CAUTION

During installation or replacement, seat all slide-in cards with aslow but firm motion. Do not push them quickly into a slot.

Many slide-in cards have longer power connector pins to minimize

power surges during installation. Insert the slide-in cards slowly toavoid damage.

CAUTION

(1) NEVER look into the end of an optical cable or fibre pigtail.

(2)  PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur

if laser radiation is present.

(3)  NEVER handle exposed fibre with bare hands or permit

contact with the body. Fibre fragments into skin are difficultto detect and remove.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 72/214

 Acceptance Test Item  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-3-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

3.1.3 Electrostatic Discharge Warning

Figure 3.2 ESD Warning Label

CAUTION

Many slide-in cards can be damaged by electrostatic dischargeduring installation, removal, storage, or shipment. Such cards haveElectrostatic Discharge (ESD) warning labels attached (Figure 3.2)and are required special care in handling and storage. The followingprecautions must be strictly observed:

 Always wear a wrist strap connected to the ground terminal whenhandle the slide-in cards. The wrist strap must have a minimumresistance of 250 kohms. Before using the wrist strap, check forcontinuity, shorts and minimum resistance value. Replace the wriststrap if it fails any of these checks.

Hold only the edge of the slide-in cards. Do not touch IC leads or

circuitry on the cards.

Transport or store slide-in cards in the special bags in which thecards were originally shipped. Always fold the open end of the bagover and secure with tape.

Return cards to Fujitsu Wireless Systems representatives in specialbags and original shipping containers.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 73/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only   Acceptance Test Item

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04  3-3-3

3.2 Station, Hop and Section Test Items

3.2.1 Acceptance Test Items

 Acceptance test item is shown in Table 3.2.1

Table 3.2.1 Acceptance Test Items

Task Name Manual Reference Notes

Station Tests 

Hardware Settings Section 4.1

Provisioning(Software Settings) Section 4.2

Transmit Local OSC Frequency Section 4.3

Transmit Output Power Level Section 4.4Transmit Spectrum (Laboratory Test Only) Section 4.5

Rack Alarm Tests Section 4.6

Hop Tests 

Change to IS-MT Section 5.1

Receive Signal Level Section 5.2

Delay Equalizer Setting Section 5.3

 Auto IF- IF Adjustment Section 5.4

 Auto SD DADE Adjustment (SD only) Section 5.5

 Auto XPIC DADE Adjustment (CCDP only) Section 5.6

 Auto RPS DADE Adjustment Section 5.7

Radio Protection Switch Test Section 5.8

Stability Test of STM-1 Signal Section 5.9

Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Test Section 5.10

Change to IS Section 5.11

Section Tests 

RUC Test Section 6.1

Order Wire (OW) Test Section 6.2

Stability Test of Wayside Signal Section 6.3

Stability Test of STM-1 Signal Section 6.4

Gigabit Ethernet Transmission test Section 6.5

Note*: In case that test result is out of specification, please refer to Chapter 6Trouble Shooting.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 74/214

 Acceptance Test Item  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-3-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

3.2.2 Scope of Station, Hop and Section Tests

 Acceptance tests are summarized by three (3) parts;

(1) Station Test(2) Hop Test

(3) Section Test (Terminal-to-Terminal Test)

Figure 3.1 shows the scope of on-site acceptance test.

Figure 2.3 Scope of On-site Acceptance Tests

Station A and U: Terminal station with STM-1 add/drop facility

Station B to T: Terminal/Repeater station without STM-1 add/drop facility

3.3 Provisional Acceptance Test (PAT)

Provisional acceptance test (PAT) is the commissioning test carried out at

initial stage after FRX-3E delivery on site as follows;-- 

  Preparation for acceptance test included

  Station test items indicated in Table 3.2.1 included

  Hop test items indicated in Table 3.2.1 included  Section items indicated in Table 3.2.1 included

  After provisional acceptance test, test operation period more than threemonths will be made

A B C S T UStation Name

Station Tests

Hop Tests

Section Tests

Radio Route

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 75/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only   Acceptance Test Item

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04  3-3-5

3.4 Final Acceptance Test (FAT)

Final acceptance test (FAT) is carried out after service operation on site as

follows;-- 

  Limited Station test items indicated in Table 3.2.1 included

  Limited Hop test items indicated in Table 3.2.1 included

  Limited Section items indicated in Table 3.2.1 included

  Final circuit quality should be met with Tender Specification in accordancewith ITU-T M.2101 and ITU-R F.1033.

FUJITSU recommended FAT test item is shown in Table 3.4.

Table 3.4 Recommended Final Acceptance Test Items

Task Name Manual Reference Notes

Station Tests 

Transmit Local OSC Frequency Section 3.3

Transmit Output Power Level Section 3.4

Hop Tests 

Receive Signal Level Section 4.1

Radio Protection Switch Test Section 4.8

Section Tests 

Order Wire (OW) Test Section 5.2

Stability Test of Wayside Signal Section 5.3

Stability Test of STM-1 Signal Section 5.4

Gigabit Ethernet Transmission test Section 5.5

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 76/214

 Acceptance Test Item  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-3-6 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

3.5 Measuring Instrument Required

The typical measuring instrument required to carry out the commissioning

tests are as follows;--

In case of Station & Hop Tests 

  RF power meter

  RF Variable & fixed attenuator (10 W type)

  Frequency counter (> 30 MHz)

  Multi-meter

  PC for WebLT(Local terminal)

In case of Section Tests 

  RF power meter

  RF variable & fixed attenuator (10 W type)

  STM-1 transmission analyzer

  BER measuring equipment for 64k & 2M)

  PC for WebLT(Local terminal)

In case of Laboratory Test 

  RF power meter

  Spectrum analyzer

  RF Variable & fixed attenuator (10 W type)

  Miscellaneous RF/IF cables and accessories

  STM-1 transmission analyzer

  Variable optical attenuator with LC Duplex connectors*1

 

  Optical power meter with LC connectors

  Optical fiber patch cords with LC connectors

  Frequency counter (< 30 MHz)

  Multi-meter

  PC for WebLT(Local terminal)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 77/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-4-1

4 Station TestsThis section provides instructions for in-station tests for the FRX-3E radioequipment.

4.1 Hardware Settings

4.1.1 Setting Values

Hardware setting for FRX-3E equipment per station is in accordance with theSYSTEM HANDBOOK provided by the Contractor. Please do not touchthese hardware settings except in unavoidable cases.

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

4.2 Provisioning (Software Settings)4.2.1 Setting Values

Provisioning setting (Software Setting) for FRX-3E equipment per station isin accordance with the SYSTEM HANDBOOK provided by the Contractor.Please do not change these provisioning settings except in unavoidablecases.

For detailed provisioning item description, please refer to Chapter 4Provisioning a System of Web-Based LT Manual (T101-1759-05).

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

NOTICE:

Setting values displayed on WebLT screens areinitial setting values in accordance with SystemHandbook provided by the Contractor.

If you accidentally change provisioning settingdata on WebLT screen, FRX-3E radio system maynot function properly in some case.

 

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 78/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-4-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

4.2.2 Confirmation of Service State

-  Connect Local Terminal (TL IP/SDH WebLT) with SV card.

Menu: Provisioning Menu > Service State.

Confirm that all Provisioning Values are “IS” (In-Service).

4.2.3 Change the Equipment to Maintenance State

1. Change the specific RF AID to test to Maintenance State by WebLT.

Menu: Provisioning > Service State

Set Provisioning Value for specific AID to test to IS-MT from IS

Operate > “Command will be operated, OK? > OK > “CommandRequest was received” > Closed

Web

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 79/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-4-3

4.3 Transmit Local OSC Frequency Tolerance

This test is to check the TX local oscillator tolerance of TRMD card.

4.3.1 Test Equipment Required

  Frequency counter ( < 30 MHz)

4.3.2 Specification

Within 20.0 MHz +/- 200 Hz (10 ppm)measured at LOC F MON connector on TRMD cardNOTICE: Within 19.2 MHz +/- 192 Hz (10 ppm) only for 8G-T1 of TRMD v1

(NOTE: Transmit local OSC frequency tolerance measurement is not directmeasurement of TX LOC RF output, but that of reference clock of TX LOC.)

4.3.3 Test Procedure

1. Set up test circuit as shown in Figure 4.1

2. Record frequency tolerance results.

3. Compare the results and specification value.

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

Figure 4.1 TX Local Frequency Measurement

FrequencyCounter<30 MHz

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 max.) BEF (x4 max.)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

V EN T VE NT V EN TVENT VENT

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W7)

TRMD(W6)

VE NT VEN T VE NT

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(P)

Basic shelf 

TRMD(W4)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 80/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-4-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

4. 4 Transmit Output Power Level

This test is to check the RF output power of TRMD card.

4. 4.1 Equipment Required  WebLT (Local terminal)

  TRMD TEST ADPT

4. 4.2 Specifications

In accordance with Table 4.4-1 and Table 4.4-2 below;Measured at TRMD card output port.

Table 4.4-1 Transmit Output Power for STM-1 interface (dBm)

Modulation30 MHz CS 40 MHz CS

ToleranceSTP/with OD HP/with OD STP/with OD HP/with OD

64QAM (4-8G) - - +30/+32 +33/+35

+/-1 dB

64QAM (11G) - - +30/+32 -

128QAM (4-8G) +29/+31 +32/+34 - -

128QAM (11G) +29/+31 - - -

128QAM (13G) +27/+29 - - -

Table 4.4-2a Transmit Output Power for Native IP interface and 30 MHz CS (dBm)Highest

Modulation4 to 8 GHz

STP/with OD4 to 8 GHzHP/with OD

11 GHzSTD/with OD

13 GHzSTD/with OD

Tolerance

QPSK +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29

+/-1 dB

8QAM +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29

16QAM +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+2932QAM +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29

64QAM +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29

128QAM +29/+31 +32/+34 +29/+31 +27/+29

256QAM +26/(*1) +31/(*1) +28/(*1) +26/(*1)

512QAM +25/(*1) +30/(*1) +29/(*1) +27/(*1)

Table 4.4-2b Transmit Output Power for Native IP interface and 40 MHz CS (dBm)Highest

Modulation4 to 8 GHz

STD/with OD4 to 8 GHzHP/with OD

11 GHzSTD/with OD

Tolerance

QPSK +30/+32 +33/+35 +30/+32 -

+/-1 dB

8QAM +30/+32 +33/+35 +30/+32 -

16QAM +30/+32 +33/+35 +30/+32 -32QAM +30/+32 +33/+35 +30/+32 -

64QAM +30/+32 +33/+35 +30/+32 -

128QAM +29/(*1) +32/(*1) +29/(*1) -

256QAM +28/(*1) +31/(*1) +28/(*1) -

512QAM +27/(*1) +30/(*1) +27/(*1) -

STD: Standard power, HP: High power, OD: TX overdrive

Note-1*: TX overdrive function (OD) is not recommended for use.

NOTICE: TX output power adjustment using MTPC function in the Transmitter Parameter isrequired when 256/512QAM for 30 MHz CS and 128/256/512QAM for 40 MHz CS

is applied.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 81/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-4-5

4.4.3 Test Procedure

Menu: Performance > Others > Analog Monitor

1. Select specific AID to test.

Operate > “Command will be operated, OK? > OK

2. Analog monitor result appears

Note-*1: In case that TX output power by using power meter is needed, refer to Appendix-A.

3. When already calibrated transmit power output (TL) is withinspecification, skip to next test and change the equipment to In-Service(IS) state.

When transmit power output is out of specification

4. Remove the specific CIR OUT cable on TRMD Adaptor (TR ADPT).

5. Connect power meter into the CIR connector on TR ADPT.If the maximum range of the power meter is less than the rated outputpower level of the TX, insert fixed and calibrated attenuator between theTX output and the power meter.

6. Read the power meter indication.

7. If the measured power is out of the rated level, logon NE (NetworkElement) by WebLT.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 82/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-4-6 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

Menu: Control > ADJ Equipment

8. Select AID and TXPWR UP/DOWN menu.

Operate: Operate > “ADJ Equipment will be changed. OK? > OK >“ADJ Equipment Request was received” > Closed

9. Adjust TX output power by continuing above.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 83/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-4-7

Appendix-A1: TX Output Power at Point A’ by using Power Meter

1. Remove coaxial cable from CIR output port of specific TX BPF unit.

2. Connect 30 dB RF attenuator and power meter.

3. Measure TX output power

4. Record the result (Pa) and calibrate TRMD output power (Po).

Po = Pa + Calibration Loss

Figure A-1 TX Output Power Measurement

Table A-1 Calibration Loss

30-dBRF ATT

PowerMeter

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 m ax.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

V EN T V EN T V EN TVENT VENT

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W7)

TRMD(W6)

VEN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(P)

Basic shelf 

TRMD(W4)

13G 2.26

7G type5 1.74

L8G 1.7611G 2.04

U6G 1.51

7G type1 1.74

7G type4 1.71

4G type2 1.12

5G 1.30

L6G 1.53

RFCalibration Loss (dB)

TRMD ADPT+TXBPF

4G type1 1.12

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 84/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-4-8 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

Appendix-A2: TX Output Power at Point A’ by using BPF jig & Power Meter

1. Remove the relevant TX BPF unit and install BPF jig instead of TX BPF.2. Connect 30 dB RF attenuator and power meter on BPF jig.3. Measure TX output power.4. Record the result (Pb) and calibrate TRMD output power (Po).

Po = Pb + Calibration LossFor detailed BPF jig, please refer to Appendix-A attached.

Figure A-2 TX Output Power Measurement using BPF Jig

Table A-2 Calibration Loss

PowerMeter

30-dBRF

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TRMD

(W2)

TRMD

(W1)

TRMD(P)

Basic shelf 

VE NT VE NT V EN T

TRMD

(W5)

TRMD

(W4)

TRMD

(W3)

TRMD

(W4)

TRMD(P)

TRMD

(W5)

TRMD

(W9)

TRMD

(W8)

TRMD

(W7)

TRMD

(W6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD

(W1)

TRMD

(W2)

TRMD

(W3)

V EN T VE NT VE NTVENT VENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 m ax.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

Total0.52

0.52

0.56

0.6

0.64

0.67

0.68

0.67

0.70

0.820.91

0.18 0.49

11G 0.22 0.60

13G 0.23 0.68

L8G 0.19 0.51

7G type1 0.18 0.49

7G type4 0.19 0.49

7G type5

L6G 0.17 0.43

U6G 0.18 0.46

4G type2 0.15 0.37

5G 0.16 0.40

RF

BPF JIG TRMD ADPT4G type1 0.15 0.37

Calibration Loss (dB)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 85/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-4-9

4.5 Transmit Spectrum for Fixed Modulation Order

This test is to check the TX output spectrum.

4.5.1 Equipment Required  Spectrum analyzer.

  HP 8491A Fixed attenuator (30 dB) or equivalent

4.5.2 Specifications

SDH interface: In accordance with ETSI EN303 217-2-2 V1.4.1 (2010-07)Limit B.3.2, System B.3, Class 5B for 30 MHz CSLimit C.3.2, System C.1, Class 5B for 40 MHz CS.

Ether interface: Same as above as FUJITSU specificationQAM order is QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM(*1)

(1) Discrete CW components at the symbol rate of 24.192 MHz (CWs):< 43 dB for the mean power level of the carrier

(2) Other discrete CW components (CW1 to CWn)< 9.5 dB exceeding the spectrum mask limit

Figure 4.2a Transmitter Output Spectrum (30 MHz CS)

Note-*1: In case of FPGA uploaded TRMD v1, available QAM order is 16/32/64/128/256QAM.

+2

CWs

CW1

CWn

-60

-50

0

0

-10

-20

-30

7510 20 30 40 50

Frequency Offset from Center of Frequency, F0

   P  o  w  e  r   S  p  e  c   t  r  a   l   D  e  n  s   i   t  y   R  e   l  a   t   i  v  e   t  o   C  e  n   t  e  r   F  r  e  q  u  e  n  c  y   (   d   B   )

Transmitter Spectrum Power Density

Reletive to Center Frequency (dB) for 128QAM System

+2/12

-10/14.5

-32/15.5

-36/17

-45/40

-55/50

-40

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 86/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-4-10 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

(1) Discrete CW components at the symbol rate of 32.064 MHz (CWs):< 43 dB for the mean power level of the carrier

(2) Other discrete CW components (CW1 to CWn)< 9.5 dB exceeding the spectrum mask limit

Figure 4.2b Transmitter Output Spectrum (40 MHz CS)

4.5.3 Test Procedure

1. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the CIR output port through the 30-dBhigh power fixed RF attenuator as shown in Figure 4.3.

2. Compare the test result to the specification (use delta markers or mask)

3. If the result is out of specification, tested TRMD should be replaced.4. Restore the connections.

+1

CWs

CW1 CWn

-60

-50

0

0

-10

-20

-30

Frequency Offset from Center of Frequency, F0

   P  o  w  e  r   S  p  e  c   t  r  a   l   D  e  n  s   i   t  y   R  e

   l  a   t   i  v  e   t  o   C  e  n   t  e  r   F  r  e  q  u  e  n  c  y   (   d   B   )

Transmitter Spectrum Power Density

Reletive to Center Frequency (dB) for 64QAM System

6010 20 30 40 50

-40

100

+1/14

-40/54

-55/67

-10/19.5

-35/24

NOTE:

This transmit spectrum specification is specified when TX Overdrive function isset to “DISABLED”. Please note that when TX Overdrive is set to “ENABLE”,this specification is not applicable.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 87/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-4-11

Spectrum Analyzer setting

Parameter Setting

RF center frequency Spectrum center

 Amplitude scale 10 dB/div

IF bandwidth 300 kHz for 40 MHz CS, 100 kHz for 30 MHz CS

Sweep width 200 MHz for 40 MHz CS, 150 MHz for 30 MHz CS

Scan time Automatic

Video bandwidth filter 300 Hz

Figure 4.3 Set up for Transmit Spectrum Measurement

SPECTRUM

 ANALYZER

30dB ATT

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 max.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

V EN T VE NT V EN TV EN T V EN T

TRMDP

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W7)

TRMD(W6)

V EN T VE NT V EN T

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W1)

TRMDP

Basic shelf 

BBINTFP

BBINTF(W1

)

BBINTF(W2

)

BBINTF(W3

)

BBINTF(W4

)

BBINTF(W5

)

TRMD(W4)

BBINTF(W9

)

BBINTF(W8

)

BBINTF(W7

)

BBINTF(W6

)

BBINTF(W5

)

BBINTF(W4

)

BBINTF(W3

)

BBINTF(W2

)

BBINTF(W1

)

BBINTFP

SVG

ESW

GESW

AUXINTF

AUXINTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm)

TERM

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 88/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-4-12 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

4.6 Transmit Spectrum for Dynamic Change of Modulation Order

This test is to check the TX output spectrum for dynamic change ofmodulation order for Native IP interface measured at TX BPF output..

4.6.1 Equipment Required

  Spectrum analyzer.

  HP 8491A Fixed attenuator (30 dB) or equivalent

4.6.2 Specifications

Limit: Clause 5.2.7 of ETSI EN303 217-2-2 V1.4.1(2010-07).Reference mode: Limit B.3.2, System B.3, Class 5B for 30 MHz CS

Limit C.3.2, System C.1, Class 5B for 40 MHz CSQAM change: QPSK/8/16/32/64/128/256/512QAM(*1)

(1) Discrete CW components at the symbol rate of 24.192 MHz (CWs):< 43 dB for the mean power level of the carrier

(2) Other discrete CW components (CW1 to CWn)< 9.5 dB exceeding the spectrum mask limit

Figure 4.3a Transmitter Spectrum for Dynamic Change of Modulation Order (30 MHz CS)

Note-*1: In case of FPGA uploaded TRMD v1, available QAM order is 16/32/64/128/256QAM.

+3

CWs

CW1

CWn

-60

50 75

Frequency Offset from Center of Frequency, F0

-40

-45/40

-50

-55/54   -55/75

0 10

Limits of Transmitter Power Spectral Density at Reference Point B'

+3/12

   P  o  w  e  r   S  p  e  c   t  r  a   l   D  e  n  s   i   t  y   R  e   l  a   t   i  v  e   t  o

   C  e  n   t  e  r   F  r  e  q  u  e  n  c  y   (   d   B   )

0

-10-10/14.5

-20

-30-32/15.5

-36/17

20 30 40

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 89/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-4-13

(1) Discrete CW components at the symbol rate of 32.064 MHz (CWs):< 43 dB for the mean power level of the carrier

(2) Other discrete CW components (CW1 to CWn)< 9.5 dB exceeding the spectrum mask limit

Figure 4.3b Transmitter Output Spectrum for Dynamic Change of Modulation Order (40 MHz CS)

4.5.3 Test Procedure

5. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the CIR output port through the 30-dBhigh power fixed RF attenuator as shown in Figure 4.4.

6. Compare the test result to the specification (use delta markers or mask)

7. If the result is out of specification, tested TRMD should be replaced.

8. Restore the connections.

NOTICE:

This transmit spectrum specification is specified when TX Overdrive function isset to “DISABLED”. Please note that when TX Overdrive is set to “ENABLE”,

this specification is not applicable.

+3

CWs

CW1

CWn

-60

60 100

Frequency Offset from Center of Frequency, F0 (MHz)

0 10 20 30 40 50

-35/24

-40-40/54

-50

-55/67 -55/100

Limits of Transmitter Power Spectral Density at Reference Point B'

+3/17

   P  o  w  e  r   S  p  e  c   t  r  a   l   D  e  n  s   i   t  y

   R  e   l  a   t   i  v  e   t  o   C  e  n   t  e  r   F  r  e  q  u  e  n  c  y   (   d   B   )

0

-10-10/19.5

-20

-30

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 90/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-4-14 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

Spectrum Analyzer setting

Parameter Setting

RF center frequency Spectrum center

 Amplitude scale 10 dB/div

IF bandwidth 300 kHz for 40 MHz CS, 100 kHz for 30 MHz CS

Sweep width 200 MHz for 40 MHz CS, 150 MHz for 30 MHz CS

Scan time Automatic

Video bandwidth filter 300 Hz

Measurement Max-hold mode

Figure 4.4 Transmit Spectrum Measurement for Dynamic Change of Modulation Order

SPECTRUM

 ANALYZER

30dB ATT

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 max.) BEF (x4 max.)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

V EN T VE NT V EN TV EN T V EN T

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W7)

TRMD(W6)

V EN T VE NT V EN T

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINT

F(W1)

BBINT

F(W2)

BBINT

F(W3)

BBINT

F(W4)

BBINT

F(W5)

TRMD(W4)

BBINT

F(W9)

BBINT

F(W8)

BBINT

F(W7)

BBINT

F(W6)

BBINT

F(W5)

BBINT

F(W4)

BBINT

F(W3)

BBINT

F(W2)

BBINT

F(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

ESW

GESW

AUXINTF

AUXINTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm)

TERM

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 91/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05  3-4-15

4.7 Rack Alarm Tests

These tests are to check the rack alarms.

4.7.1 Equipment Required

  Multi-meter

  WebLT (Local terminal)

4.7.2 Test procedure

1. Generate any alarms.

2. Confirm contact closure with the multi-meter.

3. Apply closure to the ACO (Alarm Cut Off) input and confirm the ACOactivation.

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

Figure 4.6 Rack Alarm Bus Test Set up

Rack Alarm Bus

Output

+ 5V 

RL 

SG  –  V 

Photo

Coupler 

COMMON +5 V

COMMON

Multi-

meter 

 ACO IN 

FRX Radio Equipment

CN-112

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 92/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-4-16 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

Table 4.6a Connector Number and Type for RAB.

Use Access Name Connector No. on BWB Type of Connector

RAB UIA-CNxx Dsub 15

Table 4.6b Connector PIN assignment for RAB

PINNo. Description  Remarks

PINNo. Description Remarks

8 COMMON

15  ACO IN ACO Ground line 7 VIS MN Visible Miner alarm

14  ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 6  AUD MN Audible Miner alarm

13 NE ALM-N NE alarm (N) 5 VIS MJ Visible Major alarm

12 NE ALM-C NE alarm (C) 4  AUD MJ Audible Major alarm

11 RAB-MNT Maintenance 3 VIS CR Visible Critical alarm

10 VIS WR Visible Warning 2  AUD CR Audible Critical alarm

9  AUD WR Audible Warning 1 FG Frame Ground

Note-1*: When RAB audible and visible function is ENABLED, Pin-1 to Pin-15 isavailable. If not, only Pin-13 to 15 is applicable.

4.8 Change the Equipment to In-Service

 After completion of Station Tests, change the Maintenance State to In-Service (IS) state.

9  1 

15 

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 93/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

5 Hop Tests

This section details the procedures to be carried out after station tests havebeen completed and the FRX-3E has been connected to the network.

NOTICE:

1. DO NOT attempt to re-tune any adjustment point, if the test

result is within the specification.

2. CONFIRM that return loss result of antenna system delivered

from installation team is smoothly flat and there are no spikesand beard-like distortion or something within allocated RF

band.

3. TAKE CARE that loose connection between radio equipmentand waveguide feeder at DUP/ADPT port, feeder and antenna

and feeder bend beyond permissible limit may induce the IM3interference.

4. When space diversity reception is applied, CONFIRM that

feeder length difference between main and SD receiver pathand/or main and cross-polarized SD receiver should be within30 m (up to 150 ns). If not, feeder length adjustment should becarried out before testing.

5. When cross polarized operation (CCDP) is applied, CONFIRMthat feeder length difference between V- and H- polarized pathshould be within 30 m (up to 150 ns). If not, feeder length

adjustment should be carried out before testing.

6. Hop test will be carried out by turns from Section 5.1 to 5.12 atthe time of first commissioning test, TRMD & card replacement,

RF channel expansion and so on.

.

. 5.1 Change the Equipment to Maintenance State

Change the specific RF AID to test to Maintenance State by WebLT.

Menu: Provisioning > Service State

Set Provisioning Value for specific AID to test to IS-MT from IS

Operate > “Command will be operated, OK? > OK > “CommandRequest was received” > Closed

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 94/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

5.2 Receive Signal Level

This test is intend to confirm the result of antenna alignment by measuring theRF receiving level at the input of TRMD card.

5.2.1 Equipment Required

  TRMD TEST ADPT (Optional, necessary to place order)

  WebLT (Local terminal)

5.2.2 Specifications

Specification Remark

Receive Signal Level Within +/- 3 dB Compared with system design valueprovided by the Contractor

5.2.3 Test Procedure

In accordance with Appendix-A1

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 95/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 96/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

Appendix-A1: Receiver Signal Level at Point A by using TRMD jig & Power Meter

1. Remove the relevant TRMD card and install TRMD jig instead of TRMD.2. Connect power meter with RX and SD RX port on TRMD jig.3. Measure received signal level (RSL).4. Record the result (RSLa) and calibrate TRMD RF IN power (RSL).

RSL = RSLa + Calibration LossFor detailed TRMD jig, please refer to Appendix-A attached.

Figure A-1 RSL Measurement using BPF Jig

Table A-1 Calibration Loss

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TRM

D(W3)

TRM

D(W2)

TRM

D(W1)

TR

MD(P)

Basic shelf 

TRM

D(W9)

TRM

D(W8)

TRM

D(W7)

TRM

D(W6)

TRM

D(W5)

TRM

D(W4)

TRMD(P)

TRMDJIG

TRM

D(W2)

TRM

D(W3)

TRM

D(W4)

TRM

D(W5)

TRADPT

TRADPT

VEN T VEN T VEN T VEN T VEN T VEN T VEN T VEN T

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 m ax.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

4G type2 0.20

5G 0.21

RF TRMD JIG

4G type1 0.20

Calibration Loss (dB)

7G type1 0.26

7G type4 0.26

L6G 0.24

U6G 0.25

11G 0.3413G 0.36

7G type5 0.26

L8G 0.27

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 97/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

5.3 Delay Equalizer Select

This test is intended to set the delay equalization on WebLT for RF frequencyband used.

5.3.1 Equipment Required

  WebLT (Local terminal)

5.3.3 Test Procedure

Provisioning > Delay Equalizer Select

1. Select Provisioning Value for GP1-P in accordance with Table 5.1 below.

2. Click “Operate” button to execute.

Table 5.1 Set-up Value

ProvisioningValue

Description

NoneWhen 40 MHz CS system is applied or no lower and upper first

adjacent RF CHs are allocated for 30 MHz CS system.

Lower When lower first adjacent RF CH is allocated for 30 MHz CS system.

Upper When upper first adjacent RF CH is allocated for 30 MHz CS system.

BothWhen both lower and upper first adjacent RF CHs are allocated

for 30 MHz CS system.

Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “CommandRequest was received. > Closed. 

3. Repeat item 1 to item 2 for all specific AIDs.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 98/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

5.4 Auto IF-IF Response Adjustment

This test is to perform the IF-IF characteristics test for TX-RX overall includingantenna system at normal propagation condition.

5.4.1 Equipment Required

  WebLT (Local terminal)

5.4.4 Test Procedure

1. Logon to the NE(Network Element) by WebLT.

Condition > IF Response

2. Confirm the status colors of amplitude alarm1/2 and delay alarm1/2.

3. When green indications appear for all specific AIDs, skip to next test item.

4. When red indication appears for some AID, confirm that above Section5.3 Delay Equalizer Select of specific AID in red is made correctly or not.

5. If Delay Equalizer Select is correct, it is considered that near-end orfar-end TRMD card and/or feeder system have troubled.

6. Replace TRMD card of specific AID in red at near-end or far-end stationand confirm that IF Response indication turns to green or not.

7. If not, return loss test result of antenna feeder system both near-end andfar-end station from construction team will be checked and tested again, ifnecessary. For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 3 Trouble Shooting.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 99/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

5.5 Auto SD DADE Adjustment (When SD reception is applied)

This test is to adjust SD DADE between main RX and SD RX path.

5.5.1 Function of SD DADE

Maximum SD improvement factor is achieved when differential absolute delay time between mainRX and SD RX signal path is zero.

NOTICE-1: Recommended QAM order for SD DADE/XSD DADE is 128QAM for 30 MHz CS

and 64QAM for 40 MHz CS. QPSK is not allowed for SD DADE/XSD DADE setting..

V Main feeder  

H

 SD feeder Condition:

(1) Feeder length difference between main RX

  and SDRX side is within 30 m.

V (2) DADE (Differential Absolute Delay time

H Equalization) must be automatically adjusted

  and compensated in the SD combiner circuit.

(3) SD DADE / XSD DADE should be set in the

  normal RSL without fading condition.

(4) SD DADE / XSD DADE information is stored

  on SV. Once DADE is adjusted, no re-adjust

  is needed except for TRMD replacement.

DDC: Digital Delay Control

TRMD

(H)

TRMD

(V)

Main

 Antenna

SD

 Antenna

Delay

 AUTO

CONT

SD

DDC

Fixed

Delay

Delay

 AUTO

CONT

XSD

DDC

SEL Cont

SEL Cont

SV-CPU

SD COMB (Main)

Fixed

Delay

SD COMB (Cross-pol)

 Auto PROV

 Auto PROV

Main RX

signal

SDRX

signal

Main

Polarized

Cross-

Polarized(CCDP)

Main RX

signal

SDRX

signal

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 100/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

5.5.2 Equipment Required

  WebLT (Local terminal)

5.5.3 Test Procedure

SD DADE Adjustment

1. Logon to the NE(Network Element) on WebLT.

2. Select the adjacent TX AID at far-end station.

3. Select Control menu.

Control > RPI > Command=TXOFF & Action=Operate

4. Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK >

“Command Request was received. > Click Closed. 

5. Select the X-polarized TX AID when CCDP is applied at far-end station.

6. Select Control menu.

Control > RPI > Command=TXOFF & Action=Operate

7. Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK >

“Command Request was received. > Click Closed. 

8. Select the target RX AID at near-end station.

9. Confirm that there are no TRMD RX ALM/SD RX ALM (MN/SD-RCV-DN)in status condition list.

10. Select Control menu.

Control > DADE Adjust > SD DADE

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “Command

Request was received. > Click Closed. 

11. Repeat item 2 to item 10 for all AIDs to test.

12. Restore to the normal condition.

When CCDP operation is applied, XSD DADE adjustment will be carried out

in addition to SD DADE adjustment.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 101/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

XSD DADE Adjustment (When CCDP operation is applied)

1. Logon to the NE(Network Element) by WebLT.

2. Select the target TX AID at far-end station.

3. Select Control menu.

Control > RPI > Command=TXOFF & Action=Operate

4. Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK >

“Command Request was received. > Click Closed. 

5. Select the adjacent TX AID at far-end station.

6. Select Control menu.

Control > RPI > Command=TXOFF & Action=Operate

7. Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK >“Command Request was received. > Click Closed. 

8. Confirm that there are no TRMD RX ALM/SD RX ALM (MN/SD-RCV-DN)in status condition list.

9. Select the target AID at near-end station.

10. Select Control menu.

Menu: Control > DADE Adjust > XSD DADE

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “Command

Request was received. > Click Closed. 

11. Repeat item 1 to item 10 for all AIDs to test.

12. Restore to the normal condition.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 102/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

5.6 Auto XPIC DADE Adjustment (When CCDP operation is applied)

This test is to adjust XPIC DADE’ing at normal propagation condition.

5.6.1 Function of XPIC DADE

Maximum XPIC improvement factor is achieved when differential absolute delay time between

main path and compensating path is zero.

NOTICE-1: QAM order both V/H-polarization should be same when setting and recommendedQAM is 128QAM for 30 MHz CS & 64QAM for 40 MHz CS. QPSK is not allowed for XPIC DADE.

Main pol. signal Main signal   + =

 Interfering signal

Main antenna

V V

Main path

H Varying amplitude

H Inverse polarity

 X-pol signal

 (Interfering signal

  for main pol. signal

Compensating path

Main path signal

Compensating path signal

Condition:

(1) Feeder length difference between main RX

  and X-polarized RX side is within 30 m.

(2) Prior XPIC DADE adjustment, main TX power 

  set toOFF

 in a far-end station(3) XPIC DADE (Differential Absolute Delay time

  Equalization) must be automatically adjusted

  and compensated in the XPIC circuit .

(4) XPIC DADE should be set in the normal RSL

  without fading condition.

(5) XPIC DADE information is stored on SV.

  Once XPIC DADE is adjusted, no re-adjust

  is needed except for TRMD card replacement.

TRMD RX(main)

XPIC

XPIC improvement

SV-CPU

Fixed

Delay

XPIC of TRMD RX(main)

 Auto PROV

XPIC

DEM

Delay

 AUTO

CONT

XDDCSEL Cont

Incoming main pol. signal

Incoming X-pol signalDEM

TRMD RX(X-pol)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 103/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

5.6.2 Equipment Required

  WebLT (Local terminal)

5.6.3 Test Procedure

1. Logon to the NE(Network Element) by WebLT.

2. Select the target AID at far-end station.

3. Select Control menu.

Menu: Control > RPI > Command=TXOFF & Action=Operate

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK >

“Command Request was received. > Click Closed. 

4. Select the X-polarized AID at far-end station.

5. Select Provisioning menu.

Provisioning > TX Setting > TPC=MTPC > MTPC=2 &Action=Operate

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK >

“Command Request was received. > Click Closed. 

6. Select the target AID and X-polarized AID at near-end station.

7. Confirm that RSL is higher than -85 dBm at TRMD RF input without XPICDADE ALM (XPIC-LOS-MN/SD).

8. Select Provisioning menu.

Provisioning > RSPI > Space Diversity=Disable & Action=Operate

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK >

“Command Request was received. > Click Closed. 

9. Set Control menu at Near-End station.

Menu: Control > DADE Adjust > XPIC DADE

10. Repeat item 2 and 9 for all AIDs to test and restore to the normal condition.

NOTICE

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 104/214

 Acceptance Test  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

3-5-12 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

5.7 Auto RPS DADE Adjustment

This test is intended to adjust RPS DADE protection channel and any ofworking channels at normal propagation condition. RPS DADE adjustment is

made automatically for all working CHs without measuring equipment.

5.7.1 Equipment Required

  WebLT (Local terminal)

5.7.2 Test Procedure

1. Logon to the NE(Network Element) by WebLT.

2. Select Control menu3. Select the target working AID.

Control > RPS > Direction = Bi-Direction > Action = Operate Forced

4. Select the target working AID.

Control > DADE Adjust > RPS DADE

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “CommandRequest was received. > Click Closed. 

5. Select the target working AID.

Control > RPS > Direction = Bi-Direction > Action = Release Forced

6. Repeat item 3 to item 5 for all working AIDs.

NOTICE*: QAM order both working and protection channel should be same when setting andrecommended QAM is 128QAM for 30 MHz CS & 64QAM for 40 MHz CS.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 105/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

5.8 Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test (Only for N+1 STM-1 system)

This procedure is to confirm the operation of the Radio Protection Switchfunctions.

5.8.1 Equipment Required

  WebLT (Local terminal)

  MP1550A SDH Analyzer or equivalent

  1W type fixed RF attenuator

5.8.2 Test Procedure

1. Change the equipment status to Maintenance by WebLT both near-endand far-end stations.

Uni-Direction (USW) Switching Operation tested in the normal RSL

2. Select Control menu.

3. Select target working AID.

Control > RPS > Direction=Uni-Direction > Action=Operate Manual

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “Command

Request was received. > Click Closed. 

4 Confirm that Operate Manual operation is activated successfully and thereis no error for this activation.

Control > RPS > Direction=Uni-Direction > Action=Release Manual

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “Command

Request was received. > Click Closed.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 106/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

5 Confirm that Release Manual operation is activated successfully and thereis no error for this activation.

6 Repeat item 3 to item 5 for all working AIDs.

7 Repeat item 3 to item 5 for Forced/Lockout switching and all AIDs, andconfirm that Operate Forced/Lockout and Release Forced/Lockout isactivated satisfactorily and there is no error for these activation.

Bi-Direction (BSW) Switching Operation tested in normal RSL

8. Select Control menu.

9. Select target working AID.

Control > RPS > Direction=Bi-Direction > Action=Operate Manual

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “CommandRequest was received. > Click Closed. 

10 Confirm that Operate Manual operation is activated successfully.

Control > RPS > Direction=Bi-Direction > Action=Release ManualClick Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “Command

Request was received. > Click Closed. 

11 Confirm that Release Manual operation is activated successfully.

12 Repeat item 8 to item 11 for all working AIDs.

13 Repeat item 8 to item 11 for Forced/Lockout switching and all AIDs, andconfirm that Operate Forced/Lockout and Release Forced/Lockout isactivated satisfactorily.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 107/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

Automatic Switching Operation tested in varying RSL

14 Logon to the NE(Network Element) by WebLT.

15 Connect fixed RF attenuator between DUP and RX BPF and RSL is set to

approximately -65 dBm at point A. In case that SD receiver is applied,remove cable between ADPT and SD BPF.

16 Select Provisioning menu at far end station

Provisioning > TX Setting > TPC=MTPC > MTPC=-10

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK >

“Command Request was received. > Click Closed. 

17 Select Control menu at near-end station.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 108/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

18 Confirm that Uni-Directional Automatic switching is activated successfullyand there is no error for switching activation.

19 Select Provisioning menu at far end station

Provisioning > TX Setting > TPC=MTPC > MTPC=0

Click Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK >

“Command Request was received. > Click Closed. 

20 Select Control menu at near-end station.

21 Confirm that Uni-Directional Automatic switching is restored successfullyand there is no error for switching restoration.

22 Repeat item 16 to item 21 for all working AIDs.

23 Finally fix RF attenuator is removed and set to normal connection.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 109/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

Figure 5.4 Automatic Switching RPS Test Set up

Web LT

SD1 3 5 1 3 5 7 9

SDP 2 4 P 2 4 6 8

RX  1 3 5 1 3 5 7 9

RXP 2 4 P 2 4 6 8

TX1 3 5 1 3 5 7 9

TXP 2 4 P 2 4 6 8

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

TERMExt-BB shelf 

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

Basic shelf 

ETSI Rack (2,200 mm)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W6)

BRSW

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

TERM

BBEXTADPT

BBEXTADPT

GESW

GESW

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

SV

AUXINTF

AUXINTF

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W6)

TRMD(W7)

VENTV EN T V EN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(P)

TRADPT

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W1)

V ENT V ENT V ENT

TRMD(W1)

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 max.) BEF (x4 max.)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

SD1 3 5 1 3 5 7 9

SDP 2 4 P 2 4 6 8

RX  1 3 5 1 3 5 7 9

RXP 2 4 P 2 4 6 8

TX1 3 5 1 3 5 7 9

TXP 2 4 P 2 4 6 8

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

TERMExt-BB shelf 

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

Basic shelf 

ETSI Rack (2,200 mm)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W6)

BRSW

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

BRSW

TERM

BBEXTADPT

BBEXTADPT

GESW

GESW

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

SV

AUXINTF

AUXINTF

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W6)

TRMD(W7)

VENTV EN T V EN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(P)

TRADPT

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W1)

V ENT V ENT V ENT

TRMD(W1)

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 max.) BEF (x4 max.)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

SDH Analyser

SDH Analyser

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 110/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

5.9 Dynamic Change of Modulation Order Test (GESW v2 only)

This procedure is to confirm the dynamic change of modulation order operationfor Native IP interface.

5.9.1 Equipment Required

  WebLT (Local terminal)

5.9.2 Test Procedure

1. Change the equipment status to Maintenance by WebLT both near-endand far-end stations.

Provisioning > Modulation Config

2. Select AID, SDH/Ether=Ether, Mode=FIX and T-QAM.

Operate > “Command will be operated, OK?” > OK > “Command

Request was received. > Closed. 

5. Confirm hop performance both down-stream and up-stream is normal onperformance monitor screen.

Dynamic change of modulation order test

6. Change modulation order on WebLT from QPSK to higher modulationorder specified by license key one-by-one in the W1 of M+0 channel.

7. Confirm that hop performance both down stream and up-stream is normalon performance monitoring screen on WebLT.

8. Configure test equipment as per Figure 5.5.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 111/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

Figure 5.5 Dynamic Change of Modulation Order Test Set up

Web LT

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

AUXINTF

AUXINTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm )

TERM

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

E

SW

GE

SW

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W4)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

VE NT VE NT VE NT

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W7)

TRMD(W6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

VE NT VE NT VE NTVENT VENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 max.) BEF (x4 max.)

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

AUXINTF

AUXINTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm )

TERM

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

ESW

GESW

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W4)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

V EN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W7)

TRMD(W6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

V EN T V EN T V EN TVENT VENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 max.) BEF (x4 max.)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 112/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

Performance > Data > Specified AID

9. Confirm that hop performance of down stream and up-stream on RSPI ofRadio is normal for 15 minutes.

.

10. Do the test for all working channels.

Note: Report any problem to the commissioning manager

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 113/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

5.10 Stability Test of STM-1 Signal

This procedure is to measure the SESR/ESR of STM-1 transmission line inaccordance with ITU-T G.826.

5.10.1 Equipment Required

  HP 37717B STM-1 analyzer as STM-1 signal generator, if possible

  WebLT

5.10.2 Specifications

  ES = 0 for 10 minutes per CH

(*1): Test will be performed in the moderate propagation condition.

(*2): AGC monitoring (Fading) on recorder is made, if necessary.

5.10.3 Test Procedure

1. Perform the set up as shown in Figures 5.6a and 5.6b.

2. The measuring data are recorded for a continuous period of 10 minutes.

W1

Down stream

W#n

W1

Up stream

W#n

Station A Station B

Figure 5.6a Stability Test of STM-1 Signal

Note: Report any problem to the commissioning manager

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 114/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

Figure 5.6b Stability Test Setup

Web LT

SDH

 Analyser

Web LT

SDH Analyser

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

AUX

INTF

AUX

INTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm)

TERM

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

ESW

GESW

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W4)

TRMD(W

2)

TRMD(W

1)

TRMD(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

V EN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD(W

5)

TRMD(W

4)

TRMD(W

3)

TRMD(W

4)

TRMD(

P)

TRMD(W

5)

TRMD(W

9)

TRMD(W

8)

TRMD(W

7)

TRMD(W

6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W

1)

TRMD(W

2)

TRMD(W

3)

V EN T V EN T VE NTVENT VENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 m ax.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

AUX

INTF

AUX

INTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm)

TERM

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

ESW

GESW

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W4)

TRMD(W

2)

TRMD(W

1)

TRMD(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

V EN T V EN T VE NT

TRMD(W

5)

TRMD(W

4)

TRMD(W

3)

TRMD(W

4)

TRMD(

P)

TRMD(W

5)

TRMD(W

9)

TRMD(W

8)

TRMD(W

7)

TRMD(W

6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W

1)

TRMD(W

2)

TRMD(W

3)

V EN T V EN T V EN TVENT VENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 m ax.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 115/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

Performance > Data > Specified AID

3. Confirm the BBER test result.

Alarm > ALL

4. Confirm the Condition and no alarm results.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 116/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

5.11 Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Test

This transmission test is carried out when Gigabit Ethernet for NxSTM1transmission (Link Aggregation) is introduced when GE SW1/2/3 is used.

5.11.1 Equipment Required

  Personal computer: 2 sets

  Gigabit Ethernet LAN card: 2 sets for 1000BASE-T

  ExPing software

  Switching HUB: 2 sets for 1000BASE-SX/LX

5.11.2 Specifications

Packet communication loss < 0.1 %

5.11.3 Test setup

(1) In case of GESW v2 (1000BASE-SX/LX) interface, switching HUB,expansion module for 1000BASE-SX or 1000BASE-LX and fiber cable withLC duplex connectors both ends are necessary.

(2) In case of GESW v1 (1000BASE-T) interface, LAN card for 1000BASE-Tis needed. And also LAN cable loopback between GESWs is carried out. LANcable used is UTP category 6 type cable.

5.11.4 Test ProcedureSchematic Gigabit Ethernet test setup is shown below.

(1) Set network setting on WebLT (PC A and PC B)

IP address: 192.168.0.xxx (xxx is excluded 0 or 10)

Sub net mask: 255.255.255.0

Default gateway: 192.168.0.1

(2) Do the Ping communication test using COMMAND PROMPT

Start button >> All program >> Accessary >> Command prompt

Command input: Ping 192.168.0.11  –t  –l 1500

Program starts and “Reply from 192.168.0.11: bytes=1500 time=1ms TTL=64” displayappears frequently.

GESW GESW

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 117/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

(3) Stop Command Prompt by “CTRL+C button” and confirm that “Lost”  value is less than0.1 %.

(4) Repeat above test from PC A to PC B, and PC B to PC A.

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

5.12 Change the Equipment to In-Service State

Change the specific RF AID to be tested to In-Service State by WebLT.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 118/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

This page intent ional ly left blank

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 119/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

6 Section Tests

This section provides instructions for end-to-end section tests for the FRX radio.This test is carried out for all sections, that is, all Multiplexing Terminal-to- Multiplexing Terminals links.

Note*: Multiplexing terminal is terminal with STM-1 add/drop facility.

Station A and U: Terminal station with STM-1 add/drop facility

Station B to T: Terminal/Repeater station without STM-1 add/drop facility

6.1 RUC Transmission Test

This procedure is to confirm the normal operation of Radio User Channel

(RUC) transmission in accordance with SYSTEM HANDBOOK provided bythe Contractor.

6.1.1 Equipment Required

  64 kbit/s BER Measurement Setup

6.1.2 Specifications

  Transmission network: In accordance with System Handbook

  BER performance: Error free

6.1.3 Test Procedure

1. Confirm that the RUC network is in accordance with the SystemHandbook provided by the Contractor.

2. Measure the end-to-end BER performance for 24 hours and confirm thatBER performance result is error free (no error).

3. BER performance Measurement will be made for Go and Return channelfor all UC/RUC end-to-end channels.

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

A B C S T Ua on am

Station Tests

Hop Tests

ection Test

Radio Route

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 120/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

6.2 Order Wire (OW) Calling Test

This procedure is to confirm the Order Wire calling in accordance with theSYSTEM HANDBOOK provided by the Contractor.

6.2.1 Equipment Required

  Telephone set

6.2.2 Specifications

  Station-to-Station Calling: Good between all stations

6.2.3 Test Procedure

1. Confirm that order wire (OW) network including external telephone is inaccordance with the SYSTEM HANDBOOK provided by the Contractor.

2. Confirm that Station-to-Station calling between terminals can operatessatisfactorily by selecting station IP address.

Selective Calling Method of Order Wire (OW)

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 121/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

6.3 Stability Test of Wayside Signal

This procedure is to measure the SESR/ESR of STM-1 transmission line inaccordance with ITU-T G.826.

6.3.1 Equipment Required

  2.048 Mbit/s Error Counter

  WebLT

6.3.2 Specifications

  SESR: a x L/HRDP (L: Link length in km)

  ESR: b x L/HRDP (L: Link Length in km)

(*1): “a” and “b” values are determined by tender specification and HRDPmeans Hypothetical Reference Digital Path.

(*2): Acceptance test requirement shall be met in accordance with ITU-TM.2101 and ITU-R F.1033. For detailed specification, refer to the systemhandbook provided by the Contractor.

6.3.3 Test Procedure

1. Confirm that Wayside Traffic network is in accordance with the SYSTEMHANDBOOK provided by the Contractor.

2. Perform the set up as shown in Figures 6.1 and 6.2.

3. The measuring data are recorded for a continuous period of 24 hours.

4. Print out the SESR/ESR data after completion of measurement.

Test results = (Measured S1 and S2 values of ES/SES) / N

4. Check the performance margin between objective and measured value.

Figure 6.1 Stability Test of Wayside Signal

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

STM-1 Analyzer

W-2 (GO)

W-3 (GO)

W-2 (RTN)

W-1 (RTN)

STM-1

STM-1 

LOOP BACKLOOP BACK

W-1 (GO)

W-3 (RTN)

WS

WS

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 122/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

Figure 6.2 WS Stability Test Setup

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

A

UXINTF

A

UXINTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm )

TERM

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

ESW

GESW

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W4)

TRMD

(W2)

TRMD

(W1)

TRM

D(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

V EN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD

(W5)

TRMD

(W4)

TRMD

(W3)

TRMD

(W4)

TRM

D(P)

TRMD

(W5)

TRMD

(W9)

TRMD

(W8)

TRMD

(W7)

TRMD

(W6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD

(W1)

TRMD

(W2)

TRMD

(W3)

V EN T V EN T V EN TVENT VENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 m ax.) BEF (x4 max.)

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

A

UXINTF

A

UXINTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm )

TERM

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

ESW

GESW

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W4)

TRMD

(W2)

TRMD

(W1)

TRM

D(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

V EN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD

(W5)

TRMD

(W4)

TRMD

(W3)

TRMD

(W4)

TRM

D(P)

TRMD

(W5)

TRMD

(W9)

TRMD

(W8)

TRMD

(W7)

TRMD

(W6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD

(W1)

TRMD

(W2)

TRMD

(W3)

V EN T V EN T V EN TVENT VENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 m ax.) BEF (x4 max.)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 123/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

6.4 Stability Test of STM-1 Signal

This procedure is to measure the SESR/ESR of STM-1 transmission line inaccordance with ITU-T G.826.

6.4.1 Equipment Required

  HP 37717B STM-1 analyzer with recorder or equivalent

  WebLT

6.4.2 Specifications

  SESR: a x L/HRDP (L: Link length in km)

  ESR: b x L/HRDP (L: Link Length in km)

(*1): “a” and “b” values are determined by tender specification and HRDPmeans Hypothetical Reference Digital Path.

(*2): Acceptance test requirement shall be met in accordance with ITU-TM.2101 and ITU-R F.1033. For detailed specification, refer to the systemhandbook provided by the Contractor.

6.4.3 Test Procedure

1. Perform the set up as shown in Figures 6.3 and 6.4.

2. The measuring data are recorded for a continuous period of 24 hours.

3. Print out the SESR/ESR data after completion of measurement.

Test results = (Measured S1 and S2 values of ES/SES) / N

4. Check the performance margin between objective and measured value.

Figure 6.3 Stability Test of STM-1 Signal

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

STM-1 Analyzer

W-2 (GO)

W-3 (GO)

W-2 (RTN)

W-1 (RTN)

STM-1

STM-1 

LOOP BACKLOOP BACK

W-1 (GO)

W-3 (RTN)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 124/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

Figure 6.4 Stability Test Setup

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

AUX

INTF

AUX

INTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm )

TERM

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

ESW

GESW

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W4)

TRMD(W

2)

TRMD(W

1)

TRMD(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

V EN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD(W

5)

TRMD(W

4)

TRMD(W

3)

TRMD(W

4)

TRMD(P

)

TRMD(W

5)

TRMD(W

9)

TRMD(W

8)

TRMD(W

7)

TRMD(W

6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W

1)

TRMD(W

2)

TRMD(W

3)

V EN T V EN T V EN TVENT VENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 max.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

AUX

INTF

AUX

INTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm )

TERM

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

ESW

GESW

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W4)

TRMD(W

2)

TRMD(W

1)

TRMD(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

V EN T V EN T V EN T

TRMD(W

5)

TRMD(W

4)

TRMD(W

3)

TRMD(W

4)

TRMD(P

)

TRMD(W

5)

TRMD(W

9)

TRMD(W

8)

TRMD(W

7)

TRMD(W

6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W

1)

TRMD(W

2)

TRMD(W

3)

VE NT VE NT V EN TVENT VENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 max.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 125/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Acceptance Test

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

 

6.5 Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Test

This transmission test is carried out when Gigabit Ethernet for NxSTM1transmission (Link Aggregation) is introduced when GE SW1/2/3 is used.

6.5.1 Equipment Required

  Personal computer: 2 sets

  Gigabit Ethernet LAN card: 2 sets for 1000BASE-T

  ExPing software

  Switching HUB: 2 sets for 1000BASE-SX/LX

6.5.2 Specifications

Packet communication loss < 0.1 %

6.5.3 Test setup

(1) In case of GE SW2/3 (1000BASE-SX/LX) interface, switching HUB,expansion module for 1000BASE-SX or 1000BASE-LX and fiber cable withLC duplex connectors both ends are necessary.

(2) In case of GE SW1 (1000BASE-T) interface, LAN card for 1000BASE-T isneeded. And also LAN cable loopback between GE SW1 units is carried out.LAN cable used is UTP category 6 type cable.

6.5.4 Test ProcedureSchematic Gigabit Ethernet test setup is shown below.

(1) Set network setting on WebLT (PC A and PC B)

IP address: 192.168.0.xxx (xxx is excluded 0 or 10)

Sub net mask: 255.255.255.0

Default gateway: 192.168.0.1

(2) Do the Ping communication test using COMMAND PROMPT

Start button >> All program >> Accessary >> Command prompt

Command input: Ping 192.168.0.11  –t  –l 1500

Program starts and “Reply from 192.168.0.11: bytes=1500 time=1ms TTL=64” display appears frequently.

GESW GESW

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 126/214

 Acceptance Test Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) issue 1.05

(3) Stop Command Prompt by “CTRL+C button” and confirm that “Lost”  value is lessthan 0.1 %.

(4) Repeat above test from PC A to PC B, and PC B to PC A.

Note: Report any problems to the commissioning manager.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 127/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only Table of Contents

Chapter 4 Trouble Shooting

1 General Information

1.1 General Information .................................................................................................... 4-1-1

1.2 Measuring Instrument Required ................................................................................. 4-1-1

2 Trouble Shooting for Station Tests

2.1 General Information .................................................................................................... 4-2-1

2.2 Identifying the Causes .............................................................................................. 4-2-1

3 Trouble Shooting for Hop Tests

3.1 General Information .................................................................................................... 4-3-1

3.2 Identifying the Causes ................................................................................................ 4-3-1

3.3 Trouble Shooting for Equipment................................................................................. 4-3-2

3.4 Trouble Shooting for Propagation Path ...................................................................... 4-3-2

 Appendix-B1 BER Characteristics Test at Laboratory .............................................. 4-3-3

 Appendix-B2 RSL Recording .................................................................................... 4-3-7

4 Trouble Shooting for Section Tests4.1 General Information .................................................................................................... 4-4-1

4.2 Identifying the Causes ................................................................................................ 4-4-1

4.3 Technical Review of System Design Calculation ....................................................... 4-4-2

4.4 Trouble Shooting for Section Test .............................................................................. 4-4-2

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 128/214

Table of Contents Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) issue 1.04

This page intent ional ly left blank

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 129/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

1  General Information

1.1 General Information

This section describes how to proceed the trouble shooting when station, hopand section test was carried out and some test items was out of specification.Trouble shooting verifies the following;-- 

  Proper test equipment has been provided.

  Test equipment is properly calibrated

  Proper test and test procedure has been provided.

  Proper propagation condition analysis has been provided.

  Other interference factors are well analyzed.

  Equipment shelves are free of defects or damages.

The trouble shooting generally assume;-- 

   Accurate and concise system designations and office records areavailable to properly identify systems and equipment.

   Any faults found and not corrected during installation & commissioningare referred to the installation & commissioning group responsibility.

1.2 Measuring Instrument Required

Typical test equipment is listed below;

  RF power meter

  Spectrum analyzer

  RF Variable & fixed attenuator (10 W type)

  Miscellaneous RF/IF cables and accessories

  STM-1 transmission analyzer

  Variable optical attenuator with LC Duplex connectors*1

 

  Optical power meter with LC connectors

  Optical fiber patch cords with LC connectors

  Frequency counter (< 30 MHz)

  Multi-meter

  PC for WebLT (Local terminal)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 130/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

2  Trouble Shooting for Station Tests

2.1 General Information

This section describes how to proceed the trouble shooting and actions duringstation test period. Trouble shooting verifies the following;-- 

  Proper test equipment has been provided.

  Test equipment is properly calibrated.

  Proper test and test results has been provided.

  Proper take action has been carried out.

2.2 Identifying the Causes

Table 2.2 shows the list of identifying- the-Causes.

Table 2.2 Trouble Shooting for Station Test

Task NameManual Reference

in Chapter 3Main Trouble Shooting Method

Station Tests 

Hardware Settings Section 4.1 Checking hardware setting

Provisioning (Software Settings) Section 4.2 Checking provisioning settingTransmit Local OSC Frequency Section 4.3 TRMD replacement

Transmit Output Power Level Section 4.4 TRMD replacement

Transmit Spectrum Section 4.5 TRMD replacement

Rack Alarm Tests Section 4.7 SV unit replacement

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 131/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Trouble Shooting 

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  4-3-1

3 Trouble Shooting for Hop Tests

3.1 General InformationThis section describes how to proceed the trouble shooting and actions during

station test period. Trouble shooting verifies the following;-- 

  Proper test equipment has been provided.

  Test equipment is properly calibrated.

  Proper test and test results has been provided.

  Proper take action has been carried out.

3.2 Identifying the Causes

Table 3.2 shows the list of identifying- the-Causes.

Table 3.2 Trouble Shooting for Hop Test

Hop Tests ItemTest Item

in Chapter 3Main Trouble Shooting Action

Receive Signal Level Section 5.2 System parameter, Antenna re-alignment

Delay Equalizer Select Section 5.3

 Auto IF-IF response adjustment Section 5.4 TRMD replacement, antenna feeder

 Auto SD DADE Adjustment Section 5.5 Feeder length difference OK?

 Auto XPIC DADE Adjustment Section 5.6 Feeder length difference OK?

 Auto RPS DADE Adjustment Section 5.7

Radio Protection Switch Test Section 5.8 (1) Correct RPS BB DADE OK?

(2) Correct RPS procedure on LT(3) SV unit replacement

Stability Test of STM-1 Signal Section 5.9 (1) Breakup of equipment and

propagation path(2) Equipment

TRMD/BB INTF replacement

(3) System design parametersFading monitoring, Other system

Interference, RaderGigabit Ethernet Transmission Test Section 5.10 (1) Breakup of equipment

(2) EquipmentTRMD/GESW/GE ADPT replacement

(3) GESW software mis-setting

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 132/214

Trouble Shooting  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

4-3-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

3.3 Trouble Shooting for Equipment

Table 3.3 shows the trouble shooting for Equipment.

Table 3.3 Trouble Shooting List for Equipment

Test Item Test Procedure Remarks

IF-IF Response - TRMD card imperfection

SD DADE - Feeder length difference beyond spec.

XPIC DADE Feeder length difference beyond spec.

SD OperationLong-time AGC monitoring

recordingMain, SD antenna distance

IM3 Product Chapter 3, Section 2Appendix-A2 & A3

BER Performance Appendix-B1 Laboratory Test

3.4 Trouble Shooting for Antenna System

Table 3.4 shows the trouble shooting for Antenna System.

Table 3.4 Trouble Shooting List for Antenna SystemTest Item Test Procedure Remarks

IF-IF Response Chapter 3, Section 2.2Imperfect return loss or non-linear delaycharacteristics of feeder

3.5 Trouble Shooting for Propagation Path

Table 3.5 shows the trouble shooting for Equipment.

Table 3.5 Trouble Shooting List for Equipment

Test Item Test Procedure Remarks

Fading Monitoring Appendix-B2 Main, SD and combined output

Interference

Same System InterferenceCheck system design chart

Antenna F/B, Over-Reach and so on

Other System InterferenceOther system and/or

Rader interference.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 133/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Trouble Shooting 

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  4-3-3

Appendix-B1 BER Characteristics Test for STM-1 interface

This BER characteristics test is performed as laboratory test.

B1.1 Equipment Required

  MP1550A SDH Analyzer or equivalent.

  TRMD test adaptor

  30 dB fixed and variable (step) RF attenuator (70 dB)

  WebLT

B1-1.2 Specifications

Up fade: BER = 10-10 or better at RSL of –

19 dBm

Down fade: In accordance with Figure B1-2.

B1-1.3 Test Procedure

1. Configure the artificial transmission path as per Figure B1-1.

2. Set all TRMDs to power ON.

3. Set Maintenance State of GP1-W1 to MT-IS.

4. Calibrate received signal level (RSL) of specific RF channel at TRMD RXinput port in accordance with Chapter 3 Acceptance Test, Section 5.2RSL Test and adjust to -40 dBm.

5. Measure the RSL vs. BER performance characteristics by adjusting RFvariable attenuator.

6. Measurement is carried out both up-fade and down fade conditions.

7. Restore Maintenance state to IS (In-Service).

8. Confirm that GP1-W1 of Maintenance State is changed to IS.

9. Repeat item 3 through item 8 for all working RF channels.

Note: Report any problems to the installation group.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 134/214

Trouble Shooting  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

4-3-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

Figure B1-1 BER Test Set up

RF variableAttenuator

SDHAnalyser SDHAnalyser

SDHAnalyser

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

A

UXINTF

A

UXINTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm)

TERM

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

ESW

GESW

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W4)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W1)

TR

MD(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

V EN T VE NT VE NT

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W3)

TRM

D(W4)

TR

MD(P)

TRM

D(W5)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W7)

TRMD(W6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRM

D(W1)

TRM

D(W2)

TRM

D(W3)

V EN T V EN T VE NTV ENT V ENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 m ax.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

SD1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

SDP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

RX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

RXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

TX1 3 5 9 7 5 3 1

TXP 2 4 8 6 4 2 P

L6G, 5+1 11G, 9+1

A

UXINTF

A

UXINTF

ETSI Rack (1,800 mm)

TERM

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(P)

SVG

ESW

GESW

BBINTF(W9)

BBINTF(W8)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W5)

BBINTF(W4)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W1)

TR

MD(P)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

VE NT V EN T V EN T

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W3)

TRM

D(W4)

TR

MD(P)

TRM

D(W5)

TRMD(W9)

TRMD(W8)

TRMD(W7)

TRMD(W6)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRM

D(W1)

TRM

D(W2)

TRM

D(W3)

VE NT VEN T V EN TV ENT V ENT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

 Antenna Port (Max. 8)

BEF (x4 m ax.) BEF (x4 m ax.)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 135/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Trouble Shooting 

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  4-3-5

(a) Down Fade BER Characteristics for 64 QAM system

ETSI limit at Point B (*)

-67.5 dBm/BER=10E-6

ETSI limit at Point B (*)

-63.5 dBm/BER=10E-10

BER - RSL Performance (64QAM, STM1, 40 MHz CS)

-72.5/10E-6

Receiver Signal Level (RSL) at TRMD Unit Input (at Point A)

-74 -72 -70 -68 -66 -64 -62

10E-9

10E-10

10E-11

10E-12

10E-3

10E-4

10E-5

10E-6

   B   i   t   E  r  r  o  r   R  a   t   i  o   (   B   E   R   )

Typical BER

 BER specification

-70.5/10E-10

-76

Note*: Calibration value

at Point A and Point B isshown in Table 5-1.

10E-7

10E-8

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 136/214

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 137/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Trouble Shooting

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  4-3-7

Appendix-B2 RSL Recording

B2.1 AGC Current Monitoring

 AGC current of all RF channels (PRT and Working CHs) both Main and SDreceivers can be monitored through the XPIC connector CNxx on TRMD asshown in Figure B2.1.

Figure B2.1 Multi-pin connector layout on TRMD card  

XPICConnector

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 138/214

Trouble Shooting  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

4-3-8 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

B2.1.1 Connector PIN assignment

Table B2.1 XPIC Connector PIN assignment

Use Access Name Connector No. on BWB Type of Connector

xxx XPIC CNxx Dsub 15

Table B2.1b XPIC Connector PIN assignment

PINNo. Description Remarks

PINNo. Description Remarks

8 SG Signal Ground

15 XSD IN SD XPIC signal input 7 XIF IN Main XPIC signal input

14 SG Signal Ground 6 SG Signal Ground

13 XSD OUT SD XPIC signal output 5 XIF OUT Main XPIC signal output

12 SG Signal Ground 4 SG Signal Ground

11 SG Signal Ground 3 RLVLMON_SD SD RSL monitor Voltage

10 LVL IN Main-SD RSL differenceinput

2 RLVLMON_MN Main RSL monitor Voltage

9 LVL OUT Main-SD RSL differenceoutput

1 SG Signal Ground

9  1 

15 

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 139/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

4 Trouble Shooting for Section Test

4.1 General Information

This section describes how to proceed the trouble shooting and actions duringsection test period. Trouble shooting verifies the following;-- 

  Proper test equipment has been provided.

  Test equipment is properly calibrated.

  Proper test and test results has been provided.

  Proper take action has been carried out.

4.2 Identifying the Causes

Table 4.1 shows the list of identifying- the-Causes.

Table 4.1 Trouble Shooting for Section Test

Section Tests ItemTest Item inChapter 3

Main Trouble Shooting Action

UC/RUC Test Section 6.1 Checking UC/RUC connection

Order Wire (OW) Test Section 6.2 Checking OW connection

Stability Test of Wayside Signal Section 6.3 Technical review of System Design Calculation

Stability Test of STM-1 Signal Section 6.4 Technical review of System Design CalculationGigabit Ethernet Transmission Section 6.5 Checking L2SW software setting

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 140/214

Trouble Shooting Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

4.3 Technical Review of System Design Calculation

Table 4.2 shows the technical review of System Design Calculation.

Item Test Procedure Remarks

4.4 Trouble Shooting for Section Test

Table 4.3 shows the trouble shooting actions.

Item Test Procedure Remarks

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 141/214

 

Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance

1 Maintenance Philosophy1.1 Maintenance Philosophy 5-1-1

1.2 Human Machine Interface 5-1-1 

2 Alarm Monitoring & Database Download2.1 Condition Monitoring 5-2-1

2.2 RPS Condition Monitoring 5-2-4

2.3 RPS History Monitoring 5-2-5

2.4 Performance Monitoring 5-2-6

2.5 Analog Monitor 5-2-7

2.6 Database Download 5.2.8

3 Other Monitoring Function 

3.1 Loop Back 5-3-1 3.2 LED Indication on SV 5-3-2

3.3 LED Indication on Other Card 5-3-4 

3.4 Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) Indication 5-3-5

4 Unit & Card Replacement 

4.1 Caution for Card Replacement 5-4-1 4.2 Ventilator Replacement 5-4-2

4.3 TRMD and Other Unit & Card 5-4-2 4.4 SV Card Replacement 5-4-3

4.5 Returning Replaced Cards 5-4-5

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 142/214

 

This page intent ional ly left blank

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 143/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) issue 1.04

1 Maintenance Philosophy

1.1 Maintenance Philosophy

During normal operation, Fujitsu FRX-3E microwave radio system requiresno intrusive maintenance work by maintenance personnel. The main duties ofoperation & maintenance are;--

  Keep radio equipment and environment tidy and clean.

  Observe condition and RPS monitoring and record regularly per station.

  In case of system failure informed by Centralized Supervisory Station(SNMP Manager Station), locate the fault causes by using WebLT and/ormeasuring instrument, if needed, and review it.

  If any card fails, replace to a spare card and recover the system.

1.2 Human Machine Interface

For operation & maintenance interface, the FRX-3E provides;--

  SNMP Manager (Centralized Supervisory/Control System) provided bythe Contractor to supervise and control for total network system includingFRX-3E, Multiplexer and other communication equipment.

For details, refer to the System Handbook provided by the Contractor.

  Web LT (Web-based Local Terminal)

Major function of WebLT is as follows;

For more details, please refer to Web LT Manual, Chapter 2 WebLT.

-  Condition Display, Alarm Item and Alarm Description

-  Control Command

-  Provisioning Setting Command

-  Performance Monitoring

-  History & File Command (History/Download/Upload)

  LED indications on each unit.

-  LED on SV card

-  LED on other cards

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 144/214

Routine Maintenance Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

  Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) to extend alarm/status information to externalcommunication equipment is as follows. For details, please refer toSection 3.4.

-  NE Alarm (*1)

-  Alarm Cut Off (*1)

-  Audio Critical Alarm

-  Visual Critical Alarm

-  Audio Major Alarm

-  Visual Major Alarm

-  Audio Minor Alarm

-  Visual Minor Alarm

-  Audio Warning

-  Visual Warning

-  Maintenance

Note-*1: When RAB module is not installed on SV card, only NE Alarm

and Alarm Cut OFF are available.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 145/214

 Monitoring

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

2 Condition Monitoring & Database Download

Regular condition monitoring items for routine maintenance and database storage ofprovisioning setting data are described below;

2.1 Condition Monitoring

Condition > Display

Confirm that all slot cards are displayed in green and no alarm indicationappears.

Menu: Condition > Display

When alarm appears, click Condition < TRMD/BBINTF/COM to itemizethe detailed alarm item and description.

In case of CR (Critical Alarm) and MJ (Major Alarm), quick action shouldbe necessary. And for MN (Minor Alarm), WR (Warning) and MAINT(Maintenance), access to information is needed.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 146/214

Monitoring Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

Condition > ALL

Confirm that the summarized Alarm Time, AID Type, AID, Item, SA/NSA andSEV form Condition > ALL menu.

Condition > TRMD

Judging alarm item and alarm description, trouble shooting should be

carried out from Condition > TRMD.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 147/214

 Monitoring

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

 

Condition > BB INT

Judging alarm item and alarm description, trouble shooting should becarried out from Condition > BBINTF.

Condition > COM

Judging alarm item and alarm description, trouble shooting should becarried out from Control > COM.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 148/214

Monitoring Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

2.2 RPS Condition Monitoring

Confirm the normal Radio Protection Switching (RPS) condition.

Menu: Control > RPS

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 149/214

 Monitoring

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

 

2.3 RPS History Monitoring

Record the RPS performance of PSAC/FSRC/PSAD/FSAD for the specified AID regularly.

Menu: Performance > Data > GP<1/2>-< P and M1 to M#n >

In case of abnormal RPS performance, review and investigate the overallRPS performance including propagation condition.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 150/214

Monitoring Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

2.4 Performance Monitoring

Record the Performance Monitoring for all RF channels regularly. 

Menu: Performance > Data > GP<1/2>-<P and W1 to W#n>

In case of abnormal performance monitoring, review and investigate theoverall performance including propagation condition.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 151/214

 Monitoring

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

 

2.5 Analog Monitor

Record the Analog Monitor of RL-M/SD and TL for all RF channels regularly. 

Menu: Performance > Others > Analog Monitor

This short term RF level monitor is very convenient to recognize the TRMDinput and output signal level.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 152/214

Monitoring Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

2.6 Database Download

Store the provisioning setting database inside SV card regularly to the PC.This work is very important when SV card replacement is necessary. When

database storage is not made, automatic set-up (provisioning) data downloadis not available.

For detailed database download, please refer to Web-Base LT Manual. 

Menu: History&File > Download > Database

(1) Select Database and download for all databases.

Download > Do you want to create file? > Yes > Store Database on PC

(2) Database file should be managed per station for maintenance.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 153/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Other Monitoring Function

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04  5-3-1

3 Other Monitoring Functions

3.1 Loop Back

Two (2) types of baseband loopback function are available for maintenancepurposs, line loopback and radio loopback, as shown in Figure 3.1.

For the configuration of both STM-1 electrical and optical interface, the loopback is carried out at the BB INTF card inside.

Loopback test interrupts both uni-directional and bi-directional traffics.For safety of traffic, the loop back operation is guarded by maintenance state.Before carrying out loop back, you should change Service State from IS toMT-IS State for the specific RF CH.

Menu: Provisioning < Service State

(1) Set Set-up Value of specified AID to IS-MT.

(2) Select loopback menu

Menu: Control > Loopback

> Select AID be looped backed CH> Select Line-X/Line-Y/Radio > Operate

Figure 3.1 Loop Back Operation

(3) Release Loopback

 After loopback test, release loopback and service state should be IS.

SW

RSPI

RSPI

 Radio LoopbackLine Loopback

Pointer 

Pointer MS Insert RS Insert

TRMDBB INTF-X/Y

MS Drop RS Drop

RS Drop MS Drop

RS Insert MS Insert

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 154/214

Other Monitoring Function  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

5-3-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

3.2 LED Indication on SV

The SV (Supervisory) card on COM block indicates the summary ofalarms/status conditions. The LEDs on SV card are visible by removing the

bonnet cover of initial shelf.

Each card has LEDs for local indication of alarm/status summary. The LEDson each card will be observed by removing the bonnet cover.

Figure 3.2 and Table 3.1 show LED indications on SV card.

Figure 3.2 Front View of SV Card

Web LT

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 155/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Other Monitoring Function

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04  5-3-3

Table 3.1 LED Indication of SV Card

LED Indication

Group LED Color Status Description

IndicationforSV card

UNIT/RCI Red Solid on Unit failure of SV card

Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV card

Green (Y) Solid on Normal operation of SV card

Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of SV card

LINE Red Solid on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure

Green (Y) Solid on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal

MISC Red Solid on Housekeeping alarm (DI) on

 ACS/SWDL Green (Y) Blinking Provisisioning/SWDL data is being writing

Red Solid on Mismatch of software version

Indicationfor NE

NORM Green (Y) Solid on Normal operation of NE

NE ALM/RCI

Red Solid on CR/MJ/MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE

Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in NE

MAINT Yellow (G) Solid on Maintenance condition of NE

CARD OUT Red Solid on CARD ALM of NE more serious than WR

Yellow (G) Solid on CARD ALM of NE not more serious than WR

 ACO Yellow (G) Solid on Alarm cut off of NE

Orderwire CALL E1 Green (Y) Blinking Orderwire is being called

Note : Green (Y)

Yellow (G)

= Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1.

= Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 156/214

Other Monitoring Function  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

5-3-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

3.3 LED Indication on Other Card

Table 3.2 LED Indication of Other Card

Card LED Color Status Description

 All cards UNIT/RCI Red Solid on Unit failure of the card

Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) is operated

Green (Y) Solid on Normal operation of the card

Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of the card

 All cardsexcept forGE ADPT

LINE Red Solid on Loss of Main, Synch or other signal

Green (Y) Solid on Line signal (working side) is normal

Note : Green (Y)

Yellow (G)

= Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1.

= Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.

Figure 3.3 LED Indication of Other Card

UNIT/RCI 

LINE 

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 157/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Other Monitoring Function

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04  5-3-5

3.4 Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) Indication

Rack alarm bus (RAB) information can be monitored through the connector CN112 on

the back-wired-board of TRMD shelf as shown in Table 3.3.

Table 3.3-1 Connector PIN assignment for RAB

Use Access Name Connector No. on BWB Type of Connector

RAB UIA-CN112 Dsub 15

Table 3.3-2 Connector PIN assignment for RAB

PINNo. Description  Remarks

PINNo. Description Remarks

8 Common

15 RAB-Common RAB Common Ground 7 VIS-MN Visual Minor

14  ACOIN Alarm Cut Off IN 6  AUD-MN Audio Minor

13 NEALM-N NE Alarm N 5 VIS-MJ Visual Major

12 NE-ALM-C NE Alarm C 4  AUD-MJ Audio Major

11 RAB-MNT RAB Maintenance 3 VIS-CR Visual Critical

10 VIS-WR Visual Warning 2  AUD-CR Audio Critical

9  AUD-WR Audio Warning 1 FG Frame Ground

Note: When RAB module is installed on SV card, Pin-1 to Pin-15 are available. If not,only Pin-13 and Pin-15 are available.

9  1 

15 

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 158/214

Other Monitoring Function  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

5-3-6 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.53) Issue 1.04

This page intent ional ly left blank

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 159/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Routine Maintenance

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  5-4-1

4 Card Replacement

CAUTION

Most of card replacement operations affect on the traffictransmission service.

The maintenance staff should inform these operations tothe Central Maintenance & Operation Center (CMOC) inadvance.

4.1 Caution for Card Replacement

Card replacement will be made in accordance with the availability of hot swapand replacement procedure in Table 4.1,

Table 4.1 Card Replacement Procedure and Availability of Hot Swap

Card Hot swap Card Replace Procedure

TRMD Yes (1) Switchover the relevant RF CH to the PRT CH(2) Replace TRMD(3) Switch back the relevant RF CH from PRT CH(4) Card replacement without traffic interruption available

BBINTF

(electrical)

Yes Only in case that 1+1 BB redundant operation is applied,

card replacement without traffic interruption is available.If not, bi-directional traffic interruption is occurred.

BBINTF

(optical)

Yes Only in case that 1+1 BB redundant operation is applied,card replacement without traffic interruption is available.If not, bi-directional traffic interruption is occurred.

STM4O Yes With STM-4 traffic interruption

SV Yes (1) Confirmation of not being ACS/SWDL(2) Replace SV card with default mode(3) Memory set-up value backup from PC.(4) Remove SV and plug-in again with operation mode

 AUX INTF Yes With radio user channel traffic interruption

GESW v1 Yes With 1000BASE-T/SX/LX signal interruption

GESW v2 Yes With 1000BASE-T/SX/LX signal interruption

BRSW Yes With bi-directional STM-1 electrical signal interruption

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 160/214

Routine Maintenance  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

5-4-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

4.2 Ventilator Replacement

VENT unit on TRMD Adaptor is equipped with four air cooling ventilators fortwo TRMD cards. VENT unit should be replaced with spares when VENT

alarm is issued. Table 4.2 shows the relationship of VENT alarm andequipment condition. (MTBF of VENT unit is >80 years and >10 years perrack with 16 systems working condition.)

Table 4.2 VENT Alarm and Equipment Conditions

Number of VENTs Equipment

Working Faulty Alarm Condition for TRMD

4 0 No alarm Normal operation

3 1 VENT Alarm Normal operation

2 2 VENT Alarm High power to Standard power1 3 VENT Alarm

UNIT Failure

TRMD power supply is forcedly OFFand BSW is activated with main trafficinterruption

VENT unit removal

How to replace VENT unit

1. One of two TRMD cards (left side) issuing VENT alarm on TRMDadaptor is Bi-Directional switchovered to the PRT channel.

2. Remove connector on VENT unit (left side)

3. Connect special jig with removed TRMD VENT cable connector.

4. Restore the RPS switching to normal condition.

5. One of two TRMD cards (right side) issuing VENT alarm on TRMDadaptor is Bi-Directional switchovered to the PRT channel.

6. Remove connector on VENT unit (right side)7. Connect special jig with removed TRMD VENT cable connector.

8. Remove VENT unit and replace new VENT unit.

9. TRMD cards (left side) is Bi-Directional switchovered to the PRTchannel and connect VENT cable.

10. Restore the RPS switching to the normal.

11. TRMD cards (right side) is Bi-Directional switchovered to the PRTchannel and connect VENT cable.

12. Restore the RPS switching to the normal.

13. VENT unit replacement is completed.Note: Above procedure is tempolary instruction and VENT replacement commandmenu on WebLT without jig will be released in near future.

PAY ATTENTION

DO NOT REMOVE VENT UNIT except for VENT unit replacement.VENT unit removal induces TRMD power supply OFF and main traffic interruption

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 161/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Routine Maintenance

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  5-4-3

4.3 TRMD and Other Unit & Card

TRMD Card

To replace TRMD, the traffic should be switched over to the protection

channel by FORCED operation of RPS in advance.

BB INTF Card

To replace BB INTF-X, the traffic is interrupted. When 1+1 BB redundancyoperation is applied, the traffic of BB INTF-X should be switched over to theBB INTF-Y channel and replacement without traffic interruption is available.

System Set-up Value Data (Provisioning Value)

System set-up data for each card is registered and stored in the SV card.When a card is replaced with spares, the system setting data will betransferred from the SV card automatically. There is no setting change after

card replacement.

System DADE’ing Value Data (Maintenance/Operation Value)

System DADE’ing data for SD DADE, XSD DADE and XPIC DADE for eachRF channel is registered and stored in the SV card. When a TRMD card isreplaced with spares, DADE’ing setting data should be re-adjusted. There isno re-adjustment needed when same TRMD is removed and installed again.

 After card replacement;-- 

  Replace card and wait at least 10 minutes to complete the system setting

data downloaded.  Check LED indication on FRX-3E equipment.

  Check Alarm/Status indication in Alarm & Maintenance/Operation menu.

  Check Analog Monitor in Performance menu.

  Check the applicable system setting in set-up menu.

  Check that Service State is In-Service in set-up menu.

  Leave equipment for stability check at least 30 minutes.

  Check Error Performance by Current in Performance menu.

  Compare the above data with other channels.

  Minimize setting change and re-adjustment of the replaced card unlessperformance does not meet the long term specification. If setting changeand readjustment required, follow the instructions of Part 3 “AcceptanceTest ” .

Removal of Miss-removal Protection Metal Plate

Remove the miss-removal protection metal plate located in the upper part ofslide-in-unit shelf on BB INTF block;--

  Remove the metal plate by two fixing bolts before unit replacement

  Fix the metal plate by two fixing bolts after replacement

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 162/214

Routine Maintenance  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

5-4-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

4.4 SV Card Replacement

The system setting data (provisioning setting data) is stored in the innermemory on the main PCB on SV card. Therefore the data should beregistered to the spare SV unit when SV card fails.

To replace the SV card with a spare SV card;--

  System setting data should be downloaded regularly from working SVcard to the PC (Welt) that is already installed by History&Downloadapplication of WebLT. If not, all provisioning data downloading is notpossible. For detailed downloading, refer to the Web-Based LT Manual.

  Check the RPS is in normal condition (no protection switch operation).

  Check the ASC/SWDL LED being off (no one access the NE)

  Change the Service State of RPS from Enable to Disable.

Set-up > RF Setting > Radio Interface (RSPI)> Select working AIDs

> Enable to Disable for all working CHs> Operate

  Remove the failed SV card.

  Set switch SW24A-bit7 and SWB1A-bit2 on spare SV card to ON.(default value)

  Mount the spare SV card.

  Wait a minute for SV card startup.

  Set IP address of WebLT to 192.168.0.xx (xx: except 10) and set IPaddress of spare SV card to 192.168.0.10.

  System setting data is uploaded WebLT to spare SV card.

History& Download > Upload > Database> Select DB folder on PC> Upload

  Set operation IP address to the spare SV unit.

  Remove the spare SV unit.

  Set switch SW24A-bit7 and SWB1A-bit2 on spare SV unit to OFF.(operation mode)

  Set IP address of WebLT to normal state.

  Change the Service State of RPS from Disable to Enable.

Set-up > RF Interface > Radio Interface (RPSI)> Select AID for all working CHs

> Disable to Enable> Operate

  Check the RPS operations. If the failure of SV unit extended to the RPStotal operation, you must check all functions related.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 163/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Routine Maintenance

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  5-4-5

Figure 4.1 shows the SW24A and SWB1A position

CAUTION

This SV card contains devices that may be damaged byElectrostatic Discharge (ESD).

Observe all precautions relating to the safe handling of ESDsensitive equipment.

Figure 4.1 Switch SW24A and SWB1A position

SW24A 

SWB1A 

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 164/214

Routine Maintenance  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

5-4-6 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

4.5 Returning Replaced Cards

Cards for Fujitsu FRX-3E equipment are manufactured based on high densityintegrated assembling and require special tools, jigs and measurementequipment for repair. Faulty unit should be returned to the manufacturer forrepair.

For quick and adequate repair work, following information is essential to beattached to the unit.

  Unit name

  Serial No.

  Station name

  Facing station name

  Frequency band

  Channel No.

  System configuration

  Date and time alarm/abnormality detected

  Date and time the unit replaced

  Detailed description of alarm/abnormality

  Alarm/status log of the local station and associated stations

  Error performance log of the local station and associated stations

  Detailed description after unit replacement

The user can use its own report format.

Table 4.2 shows an example of “Faulty Unit Report” 

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 165/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Routine Maintenance

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  5-4-7

Table 4.2 Faulty Card Report (Example)

FAULTY CARD REPORT 

Card Name Serial No.

Station Name Facing Station

Freq. Band CH No. (TX Freq.)

System Configuration

No. of Work CHs Prot CH  Yes  No

BB Interface  STM1E

 STM1O

 STM4O

 GE SW

Operation Sys  ACCP/ACAP

 CCDP

1+1

BB Redundant

 Yes

 No

If you are returning an TRMD, please fill the below;--

TX output level (specification) = dBm, SD = Yes  No

Modulation Sys = 64QAM  128QAM

Date/time Alarm detected (mm/dd/yy. hh:mm) 

Date/time Unit replaced (mm/dd/yy. hh:mm) 

Details of alarm/status and other conditions before card replacement

Details of alarm/status and other conditions after card replacement

Other comments if any

Compiled by Date (mm/dd/yy)

Checked by Date (mm/dd/yy)

 Approved by Date (mm/dd/yy)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 166/214

Routine Maintenance  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

5-4-8 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

4.6 Slide-In Card Mounting/Removal

Slide-in cards are locked to the shelf by card puller with latching lever andalso protected not to remove fixing screws or metal plate for strong vibration,especially earthquake.

To mount a slide-in card, lift latching lever first, then slide in the right slotfirmly and close latching levers confirming that levers are engaging with theshelf securely.

To remove a card, lift latching levers and pull out the card.

Note-*1: For the removal of TRMD card, please see Appendix-A.

Figure 4.2

TRMD card has only one (1)latches at the bottom and one(1) mounting screws at the topof card. (Note-*1)

Figure 4.3

BB INTF, AUX INTF, BB EXT ADPT & BRSW cards have onlyone (1) latch at the bottomeach. And after mountingslide-in- cards, all cards arelocked by pull-out protectionmetal plates.

SV, STM4O and GE SW cardshave two (2) latches at the topand bottom each.

 AUX INTFand BB EXT ADPTcards have one (1) latch at thebottom. 

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 167/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  Routine Maintenance

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  5-4-9

Appendix-A: Removal Procedure of TRMD card

Procedure-1: Loose mounting screw at the top of TRMD.

Procedure-2: Grip the head of screw in one hand and latch release in anoter hand.

Procedure-3: Remove carefully TRMD card horizontally with both hands.

Pay Attention

DO NOT remove TRMD only by card-pullerat bottom of TRMD card.

1

2

3

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 168/214

Routine Maintenance  Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

5-4-10 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

This page intent ional ly left blank

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 169/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  i

Chapter 6 RF Channel Expansion Procedure

1 General Information1.1 General 6-1-1

1.2 BRU Installation with/without Traffic Interruption 6-1-1

1.3 RF Channel Expansion Procedure Flow 6-1-2

1.4 Manual Setting of ACO and Buzzer OFF 6-1-5

2 RF Expansion Work for SDH Interface

2.1 TRMD Adaptor Installation (STEP-1) 6-2-12.2 DUP/ADPT Installation (STEP-2) 6-2-4

2.3 TX/RX/SD BPF Installation (STEP-3) 6-2-5

2.4 BEF Installation (STEP-4) 6-2-8

2.5 TRMD/BB INTF Card installation (STEP-5) 6-2-10

2.6 BRU Installation with/without Traffic Interruption (STEP-6) 6-2-11

2.6.1 BRU Installation with Traffic Interruption (STEP-7) 6-2-11

2.6.2 BRU Installation without Traffic Interruption (STEP-8) 6-2-13

2.7 Set-up (Provisioning) Setting (STEP-9) 6-2-16

2.8 On-Site Test (STEP-10) 6-2-17

2.9 RPS Test for All RF Channels (STEP-11) 6-2-18

3 RF Expansion Work for Ether Interface3.1 TRMD Adaptor Installation (STEP-1) 6-3-1

3.2 DUP/ADPT Installation (STEP-2) 6-3-1

3.3 TX/RX/SD BPF Installation (STEP-3) 6-3-1

3.4 BEF Installation (STEP-4) 6-3-1

3.5 TRMD/BB INTF Card installation (STEP-5) 6-3-1

3.6 BRU Installation with/without Traffic Interruption (STEP-6) 6-3-1

3.6.1 BRU Installation with Traffic Interruption (STEP-7) 6-3-1

3.6.2 BRU Installation without Traffic Interruption (STEP-8) 6-3-1

3.7 Set-up (Provisioning) Setting (STEP-9) 6-3-2

3.8 On-Site Test for Newly Expansion Channel (STEP-10) 6-3-3

3.9 Ether Test after BBINTF(SPC) Card Installation STEP-11) 6-3-4

3.10 RPS DADE & RPS Test for Existing SDH System (STEP-11) 6-3-5

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 170/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only Table of Contents

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05  ii

This page intent ional ly left blank

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 171/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-1-1

1 General Information

1.1 General

Necessary installation for RF Channel Expansion on site is summarized asfollows;--

  TRMD Adaptor installation, if necessary

  Duplexer and/or Adaptor Installation, if necessary

  TX/RX/SD filter unit installation to the TRMD Adaptor

  BEF filter unit installation to the TR Adaptor, if necessary

  TRMD/BBINTF/GESW/GE ADPT/BBINTF(SPC) card installation basedon RF channel expansion plan

  Provisional Data Setting

  Coaxial cable connection between circulators on filter unit

  On-Site test and confirmation of traffic for RF channel expansion

1.2 BRU Installation with/without Traffic Interruption 

There are two types of BRU installation, one is BRU installation with trafficinterruption and the other is BRU installation without traffic interruption.

  In case that Space Diversity (SD) reception is not applied

When BRU network is loss equalized (Loss equalized BRU network isstandard configuration for FRX-3E), BRU installation with trafficinterruption is essential.

When the Customer strongly wants to maintain BRU network withouttraffic interruption when RF channel expansion is needed, full BRUnetwork installation at initial stage is recommended.

  In case that Space diversity (SD) reception is applied

BRU installation without traffic interruption is possible. However greatcare should be taken for BRU installation procedure.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 172/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-1-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

1.3 RF Channel Expansion Procedure Flow

Two (2) examples of RF channel expansion procedure flow in the presence of

N+1 SDH system with OCC function are shown in Figure 1.3 below:(1) RF channel expansion for SDH system (Figure 1.3a)

For detailed RF channel expansion procedure, refer to Section 2.

(2) RF channel expansion for Ether system with SPC (Figure 1.3b & 1.3c)

For detailed RF channel expansion procedure, refer to Section 3.

Figure 1.3a RF Channel Expansion Flow for SDH Channel

With Without

With/Without Traffic Interruption

Cable Connection Procedure-1 Cable Connection Procedure-2

Provisioning Set-up

On-Site Testing

STEP-6

RF CH Expansion

TRMD Adaptor Installation

DUP/ADPT Installation

BPF Unit Installation

BEF Unit Installation

TRMD/BB INTF Card Installation

STEP-7 STEP-8

STEP-9

STEP-10

STEP-1

STEP-2

STEP-3

STEP-4

STEP-5

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 173/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-1-3

Figure 1.3b RF Channel Expansion Flow for Ether Channel

(When BBINTF (SPC) is not installed)

With Without

STEP-9 Provisioning Setting

STEP-10 On-Site Test

STEP-6 With/Without Traffic Interruption

STEP-7 Cable Connection Procedure-1 Cable Connection Procedure-2 STEP-8

STEP-3 BPF Unit Installation

STEP-4 BEF Unit Installation

STEP-5TRMD/GESW/GEADPT

Installation

RF CH Expansion

STEP-1 TRMD Adaptor Installation

STEP-2 DUP/ADPT Installation

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 174/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-1-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

Figure 1.3b RF Channel Expansion Flow for Ether Channel(When BBINTF (SPC) is installed instead of BBINTF (STM1E/O))

With Without

m+0 Ether Test

RPS DADE & RPS Test for 

existing SDH system

STEP-12

STEP-13

STEP-11

RF CH Expansion

STEP-1 TRMD Adaptor Installation

STEP-2 DUP/ADPT Installation

BBINTF(SPC) Installation

instead of BBINTF(STM1E/O)

STEP-7 Cable Connection Procedure-1 Cable Connection Procedure-2

STEP-3 BPF Unit Installation

STEP-4 BEF Unit Installation

STEP-5TRMD/GESW/GEADPT/

BBINTF(SPC) Installation

STEP-8

STEP-9 Provisioning Setting

STEP-10 On-Site Test

STEP-6 With/Without Traffic Interruption

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 175/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-1-5

1.4 Manual Setting of ACO and Buzzer OFF

Prior to RF channel expansion work, visual and audible alarm should be OFFfor the maintenance purpose point of view as shown in Table 1.4.

Table 1.4 Alarm Cut Off and Buzzer Off

Item Description Remarks

 Alarm Cut Off (ACO) ACO switch on SV card ON

 Alarm Cut Off (ACO) RAB information from externalequipment.

Buzzer Off (BZ OFF) Buzzer EN switch on SV card OFF

OPEN = Buzzer Disable CLOSE = Buzzer Enable 

CLOSE OPEN

 

Factory use 

(Default = Open) 

Buzzer Enable

BZ EN switch

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 176/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-1-6 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

This page intent ional ly left blank

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 177/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-2-1

2 RF Expansion Work for SDH Interface

This RF expansion work describes the detailed procedures necessary forSDH channel expansion work on site and existing system is N+1 SDH systemwith OCC as an example. 

2.1 TRMD Adaptor Installation (STEP-1)

Figure 2.1 TRMD Adaptor Installation to the Basic Shelf

TRMD Adaptor is fixed byscrews at the top and bottom tothe TRMD shelf on 2xTRMD

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 178/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-2-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

Figure 2.1b Front Side of TRMD Adaptor

(2xTRMD ADPTs for max. 4 RF CH expansion)

VENT Plug-in(max. 2xVENTs)

BPF Plug-in(max. x 6 BPFs)

Fixing Point tothe TR ADPT

Fixing Point tothe TR ADPT

TRMDAdaptor

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 179/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-2-3

Figure 2.1c Rear Side of TRMD Adaptor

(1xTRMD card and 6xBPF units are plug-in’ed) 

Plug-in CN forTRMD card (x3)

Plug-in CN forBPF unit (x6)

Semi-rigid coaxialcable (x6)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 180/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-2-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

2.2 DUP/ADPT Installation (STEP-2)

Typical Duplexer/Adapter installation of ACAP operation using V (H)-polarization with SD is shown in Figure 2.2 as an example.

 And typical antenna port location on top of TRMD shelf is described inChapter 4, Section 4.2, Waveguide Connection of Installation Manual.

Figure 2.2 Typical DUP/ADP Installation

TRMD Shelf Front

 Adaptor (ADPT) for space diversity (SD)reception port from antenna system ofV (H) - polarization

 ADP/cables are installed at factory.

 Adapter (ADPT) for Space diversity(SD) reception port from antennasystem of V (H) - polarization

 ADPT/cablea will be installed on site atthe time of RF CH expansion.

Transmit-Receive Duplexer (DUP) fortransmit and main receiver port to/fromantenna system of V (H) - polarizationfor initial stage

DUP/cables will be installed at factory.

Transmit-Receive Duplexer (DUP) fortransmit and main receive port to/fromantenna system of H (V)-polarizationfor future RF expansion.

DUP/cables will be installed on site at thetime of RF CH expansion.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 181/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-2-5

2.3 TX/RX/SD BPF Unit Installation (STEP-3)

 After TRMD Adaptor installation, necessary BPF units are installed to the

TRMD Adaptor as shown in Figure 2.3.

Figure 2.3a Typical BPF Unit Installation

TRMD Adaptor has max. 6 BPF unitslots for 2xTRMD cards located 2xTX,2xRX and 2xSD BPF units from thebottom.

Each BPF unit is plug-in’ed to the TRADPT and fixed by screw on unit.

Connection between BPFs, DUP &BPF and ADPT & BPF are made bysemi-rigid coaxial cable.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 182/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-2-6 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

BPF unit (BPF + CIR type)

Plug-in Connector of BPF unit (Male)

Plug-in Connector of TR Adaptor (Female)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 183/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-2-7

Figure 2.3b Typical BPF Unit Installation

BPF unit is plug-in’edto TRMD Adaptor by

sliding rail of TRMDAdaptor.

Cable connection ismade between CIRson BPF units.

Max. 6 x BPF unitsare configured in theTRMD Adaptor.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 184/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-2-8 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

2.4 BEF Unit Installation (STEP-4)

BEF unit installation is generally carried out when innermost RF channel pairis allocated and technical consideration with/without BEF depends on projectsystem designer.

Figure 2.4a Typical BEF Unit Installation

BEF unit is installed when innermostRF channel pair is allocated.

BEF is installed in the upper part ofBRU block and quantity of BEF isdependent of system operation suchas ACCP, ACAP and CCDP.

Maximum x8 BEFs are installed.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 185/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-2-9

(a) Typical BEF Configuration of TX BEF

(b) Typical BEF Configuration of RX BEF & SD BEF

Figure 2.4b Typical BEF Unit Installation

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 186/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-2-10 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

2.5 TRMD and BB INTF Card Installation (STEP-5)

Prior to RF channel expansion work, visual and audible alarm should be OFFfor the maintenance purpose point of view as shown in Table 1.4.

TRMD card is plug-in’ed to theBasic shelf and TRMD card hasonly one (1) latch at the bottomand one (1) mounting screw at thetop of card.

BBINTF (STM1EO), BBINTF (SPC) andGE ADPT cards are plug-in’ed to theBasic shelf. BBINTF (STM1E/O),BBINTF (SPC) and GE ADPT have onlyone (1) latch at the bottom. And GESWhas two (2) latchs. After mountingslide-in- cards, all cards are locked bypull-out-protection metal plates.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 187/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-2-11

2.6 BRU Installation With/Without Traffic Interruption (STEP-6)

There are generally two (2) types of loss equalized BRU installation when RFchannel expansion is carried out. One is BRU installation with trafficinterruption when SD reception is not applied and the other is BRU installationwithout traffic interruption when SD reception is applied.

NOTICE: Provided BRU installation without traffic interruption is essential for

customer ’s request, BRU arrangement with full RF channels is recommendedin the initial stage.

2.6.1 BRU Installation with Traffic Interruption (STEP-7)

Figure 2.6-1 shows the schematic explanation of BRU installation with traffic

interruption when SD reception is not applied.

Figure 2.6-1a BRU Installation with Traffic Interruption (TX Side)

DUP

CIR CIR CIR CIR DL

BPF BPF BPF BPF

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Initial 3+1 Operation

DUP

CIR CIR CIR CIR

BRU installa tion without traffic interruption

CIR DL

BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF

Expansion to 5+1 Operation

due to no cable connection change

Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Expansion (Transmit Side)

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6

CIR

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 188/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-2-12 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

Figure 2.6-1b BRU Installation with Traffic Interruption (RX Side)

CH2 CH3 CH4

CIR CIR CIR CIR

Initial 3+1 Operation

CIR CIR CIR CIR

BPF BPF BPF BPF

CH1

BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF

CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6

CIR CIR

BRU installation with traffic interruption

Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Expansion (Receive Side)

due to cable connection change

Expansion to 5+1 Operation

DUP

DL

DUP

DL

CH1

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 189/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-2-13

2.6.2 BRU Installation without Traffic Interruption (STEP-8)

Figure 2.6-2 shows the schematic explanation of BRU installation withouttraffic interruption when SD reception is not applied.

Figure 2.6-2a BRU Installation without Traffic Interruption (TX Side)

DUP

CIR CIR CIR CIR DL

BPF BPF BPF BPF

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Initial 3+1 Operation

DUP

CIR CIR CIR CIR

BRU installa tion without traffic interruption

CIR DL

BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF

Expansion to 5+1 Operation

due to no cable connection change

Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Expansion (Transmit Side)

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6

CIR

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 190/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-2-14 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

Figure 2.6-2b-1 BRU Installation without Traffic Interruption (RX Side)

DUP

DL CIR CIR CIR CIR

RX BRU side

BPF BPF BPF BPF

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Initial 3+1 Operation

DUP

BRU installtion w ithout traffic interruption

because SD RX is still working

DL CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR

BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6

DL CIR CIR CIR CIR

BPF BPF

SDRX BRU side

STEP-1: Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Expansion (Receive Side Installation)

BPF BPF

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Expansion to 5+1 Operation

ADPT

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 191/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-2-15

Figure 2.6-2b-2 BRU Installation without Traffic Interruption (SDRX Side)

DUP ADPTRX BRU side SDRX BRU side

DL CIR CIR CIR CIR DL CIR CIR CIR CIR

BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Initial 3+1 Operation

DUP

BRU installation without traffic interruption

because SD RX is still working

DL CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR

BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6

Expansion to 5+1 Operation

STEP-2: Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Expansion (SD Receive Side Installation)

TX/RX port SD port

ADPT

BRU installation without traffic interruption

because main RX is already working

DL CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR

BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF

Expansion to 5+1 Operation

BPF

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 192/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-2-16 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

2.7 Set-up (Provisioning) Setting (STEP-9)

For RF expansion channels, Set-up (Provisioning) setting is carried out andSet-up items are as follows;

< STEP-1 > RPS Lockout for all working channels

  Control > RPS

 AID = All working Channels

Directional = Bi-Directional

 Action = Operate Lockout

Operate

< STEP-2 > RPS=Enable for all RF Expansion channels

  Provisioning > RPSI

RPS = Enable for all RF expansion channels

< STEP-3 > Provisioning Setting for all RF Expansion channels

  Provisioning > Physical inventory NE & Physical Inventory Unit

  Provisioning > Service State to IS

  Provisioning > Slot Configuration, RF Config, Modulation Config,Channel Configuration, TX setting, Delay EQL Select, RSPI, & AnalogMonitor

  Provisioning > BB interface, WS Channel, Laser Shutdown, Trace (SDHJ0 byte) & Trace (Data)

  Provisioning > HK Description, RF Description & CH Description

NOTICEIn this stage, Provisioning > RPSI menu remains unchanged,

that is, RPS for RF expansion AID remains unchaged “Disable”.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 193/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-2-17

2.8 On-Site Test (STEP-10)

For RF expansion channels, On-Site Test is carried out. On-Site Test itemsare as follows;

Chapter 2 Hardware & Software Setting

  Hardware Setting on Basic Shelf Card

Chapter 3 Acceptance Test

Station Test

  Transmit Local OSC Frequency Tolerance

  Transmit Output Power Level

  Rack Alarm Test

Hop Test

  Receive Signal Level

  Delay Equalizer Select

  Auto IF-IF Response Adjustment

  Auto SD DADE Adjustment

  Auto XPIC DADE Adjustment

  RPS test for all RF expansion channels

  Stability test of STM-1 Signal

Section Test

  Stability Test of Wayside Signal (Only for RF expansion CHs)

  Stability Test of STM-1 Signal (Only for RF expansion CHs)

NOTICESPECIAL CARE should be taken not to affect the EXISTING

WORKING CHANNELS for this On-Site Test.

RPS Test for RF Channel expansion is ONLY APPLICABLE.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 194/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-2-18 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

2.9 RPS Test for All RF Channels (STEP-11)

RPS Test step and items are as follows;

< STEP-1 > RPS Lockout Release for all working channels

  Control > RPS

 AID = All working Channels

Directional = Bi-Directional

 Action = Release Lockout

Operate

< STEP-2 > RPS=Enable for all RF Working channels  Provisioning > RPSI

RPS = Enable for all RF existing channels

< Step-5 > RPS Confirmation

  Confirm that RPS operation is normal for all RF channel

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 195/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-3-1

3 RF Expansion Work for Ether Interface

This RF expansion work describes the detailed procedures necessary forEther channel expansion work with SPC on site and the existing system isN+1 SDH system with OCC as an example. 

3.1 TRMD Adaptor Installation (STEP-1)

Same as Chapter 2, Section 2.1

3.2 DUP/ADPT Installation (STEP-2)

Same as Chapter 2, Section 2.2

3.3 TX/RX/SD BPF Unit Installation (STEP-3)

Same as Chapter 2, Section 2.3

3.4 BEF Unit Installation (STEP-4)Same as Chapter 2, Section 2.4

3.5 TRMD and Ether Card Installation (STEP-5)

Same as Chapter 2, Section 2.5

3.6 BRU Installation With/Without Traffic Interruption (STEP-6)

Same as Chapter 2, Section 2.6

3.6.1 BRU Installation with Traffic Interruption (STEP-7)

Same as Chapter 2, Section 2.6.1

3.6.2 BRU Installation without Traffic Interruption (STEP-8)

Same as Chapter 2, Section 2.6.2

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 196/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-3-2 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

3.7 Provisioning Setting (STEP-9)

< STEP-1 > RPS Lockout for all existing SDH channels

  Contriol > RPS

 AID = All existing SDH channels

Directional = Bi-Directional

 Action = Operate Lockout

Operate

< STEP-2 > RF Setting Set-up

  Provisioning > RPSI

 AID = BBINTF (STM1E/O) card channel

OCC = Disable

Operate

< STEP-3 > BBINTF (SPC) Installation

  Replace BBINTF(STM1E/O) card to BBINTF (SPC) card.

< STEP-4 > Provisioning Setting for RF Expansion Channel

  Provisioning > Pysical Inventory NE, Pysical Inventory Unit

  Provisioning > Service State to IS

  Provisioning > Slot Configuration, RF Config, Modulation Config,Channel Configuration, TX setting, Delay EQL Select, & Analog Monitor

  Provisioning > BB interface

  GESW v1 > Composition Setting

  GESW v2 > Composition Setting & Radio Port Setting (*1) (*2)

  GESW-L2SW setting only for GESW v2

  Provisioning > HK Description, RF Description & CH Description

NOTE-*1: For Composition Setting and Radio Port Setting on GESW v2 forRF channel expansion, please refer to WebLT Manual, Chapter 5 Set-up-1(Provisioning a System) (When GESW v2 is installed), Section 7.2 & 7.3.

NOTICE-*2: Composition setting for BBINTF (SPC) cards both near-end and

far-end station should be equal.

NOTICE

In this stage, Provisioning > RPSI menu remains unchanged,that is, RPS for RF expansion AID remains unchaged “Disable”.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 197/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-3-3

3.8 On-Site Test for RF Newly Expansion Channels (STEP-10)

For newly RF expansion channels, On-Site Test is carried out in accordancewith On-Site & Maintenance Manual. Test items are as follows;

< Step-1 >

Chapter 2 Hardware & Software Setting

  Hardware Setting on Basic Shelf Card

< Step-2 >

Chapter 3 Acceptance Test

Station Test

  Transmit Local OSC Frequency Tolerance

  Transmit Output Power Level

  Rack Alarm Test

Hop Test

  Receive Signal Level

  Delay Equalizer Select

  Auto IF-IF Response Adjustment

  Auto SD DADE Adjustment

  Auto XPIC DADE Adjustment

  Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Test

Section Test

  Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Test

< Step-3 >

  Confirm that On-Site test is completed satisfactory.

NOTICE

SPECIAL CARE should be taken not to affect the EXISTING

SDH WORKING CHANNELS for this On-Site Test

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 198/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-3-4 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

3.9 Ether Test after BBINTF (SPC) Card Installation (STEP-11) 

RPS Test step and items are as follows;

< STEP-1 > RF Setting Set-up

  Provisioning > RPSI

 AID = BBINTF (SPC) card channel

OCC = Enable

Operate

< Step-2 >

Chapter 3 Acceptance Test

Hop Test

  Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Test (*1)

Section Test  Gigabit Ethernet Transmission Test

< Step-3 >

  Confirm that on-site test for Ether is completed satisfactory.

NOTICE-*1: When BBINTF(SPC) card is inserted in the protection channelslot for GESW v2 Ethernet line expansion, radio link down alarm is issued inan moment and short traffic interruption occurs before the completion of delay

time equalization between SPC (155M line) and GE ADPT (466M line) lines. .

NOTICE

This procedure is only applicable when BBINTF (SPC) card isinstalled instead of STM-1 BBINTF (STM1E/O) card in the

protection channel slot ON SITE.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 199/214

Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only  RF Channel Expansion Procedure

On-Site test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05 6-3-5

3.10 RPS DADE & RPS Test for Existing SDH System (STEP-11)

< Step-1 > RPS Lockout release for all SDH channels

  Control > RPS

 AID = All existing SDH working Channels

Directional = Bi-Directional

 Action = Release LockoutOperate

< STEP-2 > OCC = Enable

  Provisioning > RPS (GP)

 AID = BBINTF (SPC) card channel

OCC = Enable

Operate

< Step-3 > RPS Forced operate for relevant SDH channel to test

  Control > RPS

 AID = Relevant existing SDH working Channel to test

Directional = Bi-Directional

 Action = Operate Forced

Operate

< Step-4> RPS DADE for all SDH channels (*1)

  Control > DADE Adjust > RPS DADE

 AID = Relevant existing SDH working Channel to test

DADE Adjust = RPS DADE

Operate

NOTICE-*1: When BBINTF(SPC) card is inserted in the protection channel

slot instead of BBINTF (STM1E/O) card for Ethernet line expansion, RPSDADE is necessary and short traffic interruption issued in an moment.

< Step-5 > RPS Forced release for relevant SDH channel to test

  Control > RPS

 AID = Relevant existing SDH working Channel to test

Directional = Bi-Directional

 Action = Release Forced

Operate

NOTICE

This procedure is only applicable when BBINTF (SPC) card isinstalled instead of STM-1 BBINTF (STM1E/O) card in the

protection channel slot ON SITE.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 200/214

RF Channel Expansion Procedure Fujitsu and Fujitsu Customer Use Only

6-3-6 On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

< Step-6 > RPS DADE for all existing SDH channels

  Repeat item 3 and item 5 for all existing SDH channels

< Step-7 >

Chapter 3 Acceptance Test

Hop Test

  Radio Protection Switching (RPS) Test

< Step-8 >

  Confirm that RPS test is completed satisfactory.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 201/214

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 202/214

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 203/214

On-Site Test & Maintenance (SNMP-SV: V7.54) Issue 1.05

 

1  System Upgrade by License Key

1.1 System Upgrade by License Key

License key procedure that enables system upgrade is as follows;

(1) Customer informs Serial Number of relevant cards to FWL

(Take TX high power output for example, inform relevant TRMD cardSerial Number to FWL)

(2) FWL creates license key file that enables optional system upgradeand delivers to the Customer with cost.

(3) Customer downloads license key file to the relevant cards fromWeb-based Local Terminal (Web LT) and optional system upgrade isenabled.

(4) License key file is only effective for the relevant card and it is alsohighly digitally encoded not to be known by analogy.

1.2 System Upgrade Item

System upgrade item by License Key is as follows;

  TX High Power function

  SD function

  TX Overdrive

  XPIC function

  Adaptive Modulation (AM) function

  Expansion Fixed QAM (Exp Fixed QAM) function

  Wayside on SOH function (BB INTF-X/Y each)  Wayside on RFCOH function (BB INTF-X/Y each)

  GP2 / DT function

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 204/214

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 205/214

Issue 1.01 GTRMD TEST ADAPTOR

Document Code:  T101-2256 

Issue 1.01

Copyright © 2008 by FUJITSU WIRELESS SYSTEMS LIMITED

 All rights reserved. This publication is for information only. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,

transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means,electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of FUJITSU WIRELESSSYSTEMS LIMITED. The right is reserved to change information without notice. All brand names and product names aretrademarks and registered trademarks of their respective holders.

FRX-3E Technical Note  A - 1

T101-2256-01,01,001

 Appendix-A

 APPLICATION NOTE

TRMD TEST ADAPTOR 

(Direct RF Power Level Measurement Tool)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 206/214

TRMD TEST ADAPTOR  Issue 1.01

FRX-3E Technical NoteA - 2

Document History

Date Issue Note

8 August 2012 1.01 First issue

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 207/214

Issue1.01 TRMD TEST ADAPTOR

FRX-3E Technical Note  A - 3

Contents

1. General Description -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 4

2. Ordering Code --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 4

2.1 Configuration Tree ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 4

2.2 Ordering Code --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 4

3. Mechanical Description ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 5

3.1 TRMD & BPF JIG ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 5

4. How to Install ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 6

4.1 TRMD & BPF JIG Mounting to the Basic Shelf ---------------------------------------- Page 6

5. How to Measure RF Power ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Page 7

5.1 On-Site RSL Measurement ----------------------------------------------------------------- Page 7

5.2 On-Site TX Power Measurement ---------------------------------------------------------- Page 9

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 208/214

TRMD TEST ADAPTOR  Issue 1.01

FRX-3E Technical NoteA - 4

1 General Description

TRMD test adaptor (TRMD TEST ADPT) is used for direct RF power measurement forFRX-3E IP/SDH microwave radio equipment.

 Available measurement on-site using power meter test set are;

(1) Transmitter power output at point A before TX BPF

(2) Receiver signal level at point A’ after RX BPF

(3) SD Receiver signal level at point Ad after SDRX BPF

2 Ordering Code

2.1 Configuration Tree

Figure 2.1 shows the configuration tree of the TRMD TEST ADPT.

Figure 2.1 TRMD TEST ADPT Configuration Tree

2.2 Ordering Code

Table 2.1 shows the code for TRMD TEST ADPT.

Table 2.1 TRMD TEST ADPT Code

Descr ipt ion   Order ing Code

TRMDTEST ADPT

TRMD Test AdaptorComposing;

TRMD Jig: x1BPF Jig: x1

TA10064-D300

TRMD TEST ADPT

TRMD JIG

BPF JIG

: TRMD Jig for Receiver Signal Level : x 1

: BPF jig for Transmitter Power Level: x 1 

: TRMD Test Adaptor  

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 209/214

Issue1.01 TRMD TEST ADAPTOR

FRX-3E Technical Note  A - 5

3 Mechanical Description

3.1 TRMD & BPF Jig

Figure 3.1 TRMD TEST ADPT

TRMD JIG

BPF JIG

BMA type plug-in connector

BMA type plug-in connector

BPF JIG can be fixedon TRMD JIG.

SMA type connector

SMA type connector

Calibrationfactor labelof coaxialcable losson TRMD &BPF jigs

Calibration Label on Jig

11G

Calibration Loss (dB)

4G type1 0.2 0.15

4G type2 0.2 0.15

TRMD Jig BPF JigRF

5G 0.21 0.16

L6G 0.24 0.17

U6G 0.25 0.18

0.23

7G type1 0.26 0.18

7G type4 0.26 0.19

L8G 0.27 0.19

7G type5 0.26 0.18

0.34 0.22

13G 0.36

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 210/214

TRMD TEST ADAPTOR  Issue 1.01

FRX-3E Technical NoteA - 6

4 How to Install

4.1 TRMD & BPF Jig Mounting to the Basic Shelf

TRMD & BPF jigs are mounted to the shelf as shown Figure 4.1.

Figure 4.1 TRMD & BPF Jig Mounting to the Shelf

TRMD JIG Installation:

(1) Remove relevant TRMD

card.

(2) Install TRMD JIG instead

of TRMD card.

(3) Fix TRMD JIG by latch &screw.

(4) TRMD JIG has one latch

at the bottom and one

mounting screw at the

top.

BPF JIG Installation:

(1) Remove relevant plug-in

TX CH BPF.

(2) Install BPU JIG insteadof TX BPF.

(3) BPF JIG is directly plug-

in’ed to the TRMD ADPT

by sliding to the metal rail

(4) Fixed by metal screw.

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 211/214

Issue1.01 TRMD TEST ADAPTOR

FRX-3E Technical Note  A - 7

5 How to Measure RF Power

5.1 On-Site Received Signal Level (RSL) Measurement

Measurement setup:

Figure 5.1a On-Site RSL Measurement Set-up

SD1 3 5 7

SD1 3 5 7

SDP 2 4 6

SDP 2 4 6

RX1 3 5 7

RX1 3 5 7

RXP 2 4 6

RXP 2 4 6

TX1 3 5 7

TX1 3 5 7

TXP 2 4 6

TXP 2 4 6

RX/SD Input

AUXINTF

TERM

Far-end Station Rack

Power 

Meter 

Set the relevant TRMD

to CW on WebLTInstall TRMD JIG instead

of TRMD card and

measure RX&SDRX RSL

by power meter 

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W7)

SV

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W6)

TRMD(W7)

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

VE NT VE NT VE NT VE NT

TRMD(P)

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W6)

TRMD(W7)

Near-End Station Rack

V EN T VE NT VE NT VE NT

TRMD(P)

TRMDJIG

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W7)

SV

Basic shelf 

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

AUXINTF

TERM

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 212/214

TRMD TEST ADAPTOR  Issue 1.01

FRX-3E Technical NoteA - 8

Measurement Procedure:

(1) Set relevant TRMD card at far-end station to CW on WebLT.

(2) Remove the relevant TRMD card at near-end station.

(3) Install TRMD Jig instead of TRMD card.

(4) Connect RF power sensor of power meter with Receiver port ofTRMD Jig.

(5) Measure RSL both RX and SD RX and record the reading (RSLa).

(6) Calculate TRMD IN value (RSL) at point A by calibration loss due toTRMD Jig cable loss as follows;

RSL = RSLa + calibration loss

For the relation between RSL and RSLa & TRMD Jig cable loss,

please refer to Figure 5.1b and Table 5.1 below.

Table 5.1 Calibration Loss

Figure 5.1b RSL Measurement by TRMD JIG

TRMD IN (RSL)

at Point A

 Cable loss

 of TRMD JIG

No direct RSL

measurement point

RX&SD IN

(RSLa)

RX BPF

&

SD BPF

TRMD

RX BPF

&

SD BPF

TRMD

JIG

4G type2 0.2

5G 0.21

RFTRMD JIG

4G type1 0.2

7G type1 0.26

7G type4 0.26

L6G 0.24

U6G 0.25

11G 0.34

13G 0.36

7G type5 0.26

L8G 0.27

Calibration Loss (dB)

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 213/214

Issue1.01 TRMD TEST ADAPTOR

FRX-3E Technical Note  A - 9

5.2 On-Site Transmitter Power Measurement

Measurement setup:

Figure 5.2a On-Site TX OUT Measurement Set-up

SD1 3 5 7

SDP 2 4 6

RX1 3 5 7

RXP 2 4 6

TX3 5 7

TXP 2 4 6

Power 

Meter 

TERM

Near-End Station Rack

AUXINTF

SV

BBINTF(W6)

BBINTF(W7)

BBINTF(P)

BBINTF(W1)

BBINTF(W2)

BBINTF(W3)

BBINTF(W4)

BBINTF(W5)

Install BPF JIG instead of 

TX BPF unit and measure

TX power by power meter 

Basic shelf 

TR

MD(P)

TRMD(W1)

TRMD(W2)

TRMD(W3)

TRMD(W4)

TRMD(W5)

TRMD(W6)

TRMD(W7)

VEN T VEN T VEN T V EN T

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

TRADPT

7/24/2019 Frx-3e Test v7.55 Issue1.06 June2014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/frx-3e-test-v755-issue106-june2014 214/214

TRMD TEST ADAPTOR  Issue 1.01

Measurement Procedure:

(1) Remove the relevant TX BPF unit at near-end station.

(2) Install BPF Jig instead of TX BPF unit.

(3) Connect high power RF attenuator and RF power sensor of powermeter with connector of BPF JIG.

(4) Measure TRMD RF power and record the reading (Pa).

(5) Calculate TRMD RF OUT value (Po) at point A’ by calibration lossdue to cable loss of BPF Jig and TRMD Adaptor (TRMD ADPT) asfollows;

Po = Pa + calibration loss of BPF Jig and TRMD ADPT

For the relation between Po and Pa & BPF Jig/TRMD ADPT cable